Operations Manual OM 920-4 MicroTech® III Unit

Add to my manuals
120 Pages

advertisement

Operations Manual OM 920-4 MicroTech® III Unit | Manualzz

Operations Manual

MicroTech

®

III Unit Controller for Commercial Rooftop,

Applied Rooftop, and Self-Contained Systems

OM 920-4

Group:

Applied Systems

Part Number:

OM 920

Date:

April 2013

DPS, MPS, RAH, RCS, RDS, RDT, RFS, RPS, SWP, and SWT

© 2013 Daikin Applied

Table of Content

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Using the Keypad/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Navigation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Service Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Rapid Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Keypad/Display Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Quick Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

View/Set Unit Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Unit Status Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Occupancy Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Temperatures Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Flow Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

SAF Spd Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

RF/EF Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Cooling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Economizer Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Min OA Damper Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Heating Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Dehumidification Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Date/Time/Schedules Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Time/Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Commission Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Unit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Timer Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

SAF Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

RF/EF Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Heat/Cool Changeover Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Cooling Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Econo Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Min OA Set-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Heating Set-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Dehum Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Energy Recovery Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Head Pressure Set-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Evap Cond Set-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Alarm Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Alarm Limits Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Alarm Output Config Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Alarm Delays Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Service Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Timer Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Modbus Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

D3 Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Sensor Offsets Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Unit Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

BMS Communications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Trending Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Points 1-8 (Fixed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Points 9-24 (From List) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Points 25-27 (With IDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Points 28-30 (With IDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Trending Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

2 OM 920-4

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

About this Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Alarm Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Operator’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Determining Unit State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Off Operating State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Start Up Operating State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Recirculating Operating State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Fan Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Min DAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Mechanical Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Determining Unit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Determining Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Determining Cooling Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Determining Heat Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Determining Economizer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Determining Cooling Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Determining Supply Air Fan Capacity . . . . . . . . . . 80

Determining RF/EF Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Determining Occupancy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Determining Occupancy Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Unoccupied Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Temperature Control Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Heat/Cool Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Control Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Table of Contents

Energy Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Outside Air Damper Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

100% Outside Air Damper Control,

Two Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Airside Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Economizer to Cooling Operating State . . . . . . . . 95

Waterside Economizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Bypass Valve Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Water Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Cooling: Multistage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Cooling: Modulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint Reset -

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Condenser Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Heating Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Modulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

RTU Gas Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Min DAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

MPS Gas Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Indoor Air Fan - On/Off Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Fan Failure Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

OM 920-4 3

Introduction

Introduction

This manual provides information regarding the MicroTech

III control system. It specifically describes the operation and programmable options for units with constant air volume

(CAV) control and variable air volume (VAV) control.

The MicroTech III Controller is a self contained device that is capable of complete, standalone operation. Information in the controller can be displayed and modified by using the keypad/ display in the units main control panel. For installation and startup instructions and general information regarding a particular unit, refer to the applicable model-specific installation and maintenance manual.

For installation and startup instructions and general information regarding a particular rooftop unit, refer to the applicable model-specific installation and maintenance manual (Table 1).

Table 1: Installation and Maintenance Resources

Unit

MicroTech III Rooftop Unit Controller -

BACnet IP Communications

MicroTech III Rooftop Unit Controller -

BACnet MSTP Communications

MicroTech III Rooftop Unit Controller -

BACnet LON Communications

MicroTech III Unit Controller

MicroTech III Remote Unit Interface

RPS/RDT/RFS/RCS 015C-105C

RPS/RDT/RFS/RCS 015D-140D

SWP Self-Contained (012 to 130)

RoofPak RAH/RDS

Maverick II Rooftop 62-75 ton

Maverick II Rooftop 15-50 ton

Manual

IM 916

IM 917

IM 918

IM 919

IM 1005

IM 926

IM 893

IM 1032

IM 987

IM 991

IM 1058

NOTICE

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with this instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications . It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules . These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment . Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference at his own expense .

Daikin disclaims any liability resulting from any interference or for the correction thereof .

WARNING

Excessive moisture in the control panel can cause hazardous working conditions and improper equipment operation .

When servicing this equipment during rainy weather, the electrical components in the main control panel must be protected from the rain .

CAUTION

Extreme temperature hazard . Can cause damage to system components .

The MicroTech III controller is designed to operate in ambient temperatures from -20°F to 125°F . It can be stored in ambient temperatures from

-40°F to 140°F . It is designed to be stored and operated in relative humidity up to 95% (non-condensing) .

CAUTION

Static sensitive components . A static discharge while handling electronic circuit boards can cause damage to the components .

Discharge any static electrical charge by touching the bare metal inside the main control panel before performing any service work .

Never unplug any cables, circuit board terminal blocks, relay modules, or power plugs while power is applied to the panel .

Getting Started

This manual contains information designed to assist the field technician with unit setup. The technician will need to be familiar with the following topics at a minimum to successfully set up unit operation.

• Keypad navigation/editing/passwords

• Control Mode

• Occ Mode

• DSP Setpoint

• BSP Setpoint

• Heat/Cool Changeover (Zone Setpoints)

• DAT Clg Setpoint

• DAT Htg Setpoint

• Clg Enable (OAT/EWT lockout)

• Htg Enable (OAT lockout)

• Econo Enable (Changeover temp/Enthalpy switch)

• Ventilation Limit/OA damper

WARNING

Electric shock hazard . Can cause personal injury or equipment damage .

This equipment must be properly grounded . Connections and service to the MicroTech II control panel must be performed only by personnel that are knowledgeable in the operation of the equipment being controlled .

4 OM 920-4

Using the Keypad/Display

The keypad/display consists of a 5-line by 22 character display, three keys and a “push and roll” navigation wheel.

There is an Alarm Button, Menu (Home) Button, and a Back

Button. The wheel is used to navigate between lines on a screen (page) and to increase and decrease changeable values when editing. Pushing the wheel acts as an Enter Button.

The first line on each page includes the page title and the line number to which the cursor is currently “pointing”. The line numbers are X/Y to indicate line number X of a total of

Y lines for that page. The left most position of the title line includes an “up” arrow to indicate there are pages “above” the currently displayed items, a “down” arrow to indicate there are pages “below” the currently displayed items or an “up/ down” arrow to indicate there are pages “above and below” the currently displayed page.

Each line on a page can contain status only information or include changeable data fields. When a line contains status only information and the cursor is on that line all but the value field of that line is highlighted meaning the text is white with a black box around it. When the line contains a changeable value and the cursor is at that line, the entire line is highlighted. Each line on a page may also be defined as a

“jump” line, meaning pushing the navigation wheel will cause a “jump” to a new page. An arrow is displayed to the far right of the line to indicate it is a “jump” line and the entire line is highlighted when the cursor is on that line.

Figure 1: Keypad Controls

Using the Keypad/Display

The keypad/display Information is organized into Menu groups; Main Menu, Quick Menu, View/Set Unit Menu,

Commission Unit Menu, Manual Control Menu, Service

Menu, Unit Configuration Menu and Alarm list Menus.

NOTE:

Only menus and items that are applicable to the specific unit configuration are displayed.

The Main Menu allows the user to enter a password, access the Quick Menu pages, view the current unit state, access the

Alarm List Menu as well as access to information about this unit. The Quick Menu provides access to status information indicating the current operating condition of the unit. The

View/Set Unit Menus include basic menus and items required to setup the unit for general operation. These include such things are control mode, occupancy mode and heating and cooling setpoints. The Commission Unit Menus include more advanced items for “tuning” unit operation such as

PI loop parameters and time delays. The Manual Control

Menu allows service personnel to test unit specific operation manually. The Unit Configuration Menu allows the user to access to the unit specific configuration information. These generally do not needing changing or accessing unless there is a fundamental change to or a problem with the unit operation.

The Alarm Lists Menu includes active alarm and alarm log information.

OM 920-4 5

Using the Keypad/Display

Using the Keypad/Display

Passwords

Various menu functions are accessible or inaccessible, depending on the access level of the user, and the password they enter, if any. There are four access levels, including no password, Level 2, Level 4, and Level 6, with Level 2 having the highest level of access. Without entering a password, the user has access only to basic status menu items. Entering the Level 6 password (5321) allows access to the Alarm Lists

Menu, Quick Menu, and the View/Set Unit Menus group.

Entering the Level 4 password (2526) allows similar access as Level 6 with the addition of the Commission Unit Menu,

Manual Control, and Service Menu groups. Entering the

Level 2 password (6363) allows similar access as Level 4 with the addition of the Unit Configuration Menu.

NOTE:

Alarms can be acknowledged without entering a password .

The main password page is displayed when the keypad/ display is first accessed, the Home Key is pressed, the Back

Key is pressed multiple times, or if the keypad/display has been idle longer than the Password Timeout (default 10 minutes). The main password page provides access to enter a password, access the Quick Menu, view the current Unit

State, access the alarm lists or view information about the unit.

Figure 2: Password Main Page

AHU 01 1/5

Enter Password

Quick Menu

Unit State=________

Alarm Lists

About This AHU

Entering an invalid password has the same effect as continuing without entering a password. Once a valid password has been entered, the controller allows further changes and access without requiring the user to enter a password until either the password timer expires or a different password is entered. The default value for this password timer is 10 minutes. It is changeable from 3 to 30 minutes via the

Timer Settings menu.

Navigation Mode

In the Navigation Mode, when a line on a page contains no editable fields all but the value field of that line is highlighted meaning the text is white with a black box around it. When the line contains an editable value field the entire line is inverted when the cursor is pointing to that line.

When the navigation wheel is turned clockwise, the cursor moves to the next line (down) on the page. When the wheel is turned counter-clockwise the cursor moves to the previous line (up) on the page. The faster the wheel is turned the faster the cursor moves.

When the Back Button is pressed the display reverts back to the previously displayed page. If the Back button is repeated pressed the display continues to revert one page back along the current navigation path until the “main menu” is reached.

When the Menu (Home) Button is pressed the display reverts to the “main page.”

When the Alarm Button is depressed, the Alarm Lists menu is displayed.

The password field initially has a value **** where each * represents an adjustable field. These values can be changed by entering the Edit Mode described below.

Figure 3: Password Entry Page

Enter Password 1/1

Enter Password

****

Edit Mode

The Editing Mode is entered by pressing the navigation wheel while the cursor is pointing to a line containing an editable field. Once in the edit mode pressing the wheel again causes the editable field to be highlighted. Turning the wheel clockwise while the editable field is highlighted causes the value to be increased. Turning the wheel counter-clockwise while the editable field is highlighted causes the value to be decreased. The faster the wheel is turned the faster the value is increased or decreased. Pressing the wheel again cause the new value to be saved and the keypad/display to leave the edit mode and return to the navigation mode.

6 OM 920-4

Using the Keypad/Display

Service Timers

A user may override timers for a period of up to 240 minutes by setting the Service Timer to a non-zero number. When the

Service Timer is not zero, the times listed below are set to the

Service Time (Default = 20 seconds) instead of the normal values. This allows the unit to be run through its operating states without having to wait for the normal time delays to expire. These times revert to the standard values when the

Service Time count down to zero or is set to zero by the user.

The affected times are:

• Cooling Stage Time

• Heating Stage Time

• Start Initial Time

• Recirculation

• ZeroOATime

Rapid Start

The user may elect to initiate a rapid startup sequence at unit power up by setting the Rapid Start flag to Yes. When this flag is set to Yes, the Service Timer is set to 10 minutes whenever the power is reset to the controller.

Manual Control

A user may manually control outputs to check operation of components when Manual Control is set to ManCtrl. When

Manual Control is set to ManCtrl, the unit is disabled and the unit is shut down in the normal manner if it is operating.

Outputs listed in the Manual Control menu of the Keypad/

Display section can then be controlled directly until Manual

Control is set to Normal.

NOTE:

Manual Control will be set to No automatically after

240 minutes so that a person could not put the unit into Manual Mode control and walk away from the unit and let it run at the manual settings .

When Manual Control is set to Yes, the Control Mode is set to

Off so that the unit will not restart automatically.

When Manual Control is set to Normal all digital outputs in the Manual Control menu are set to Off and all the analog outputs are set to 0.0% so that all outputs are in the Off or minimum position when Manual Control is set to ManCtrl.

All alarms except those listed below are overridden during

Manual Control.

During manual control, the unit will respond in the normal manner to the following alarms.

• Emergency Stop Fault

• Duct High Limit

• High Return Temperature

• High Discharge Temperature

• Low Discharge Temperature

• High Pressure - Circuit # 1

• High Pressure - Circuit # 2

• Low Pressure - Circuit # 1

• Low Pressure - Circuit # 2

OM 920-4 7

Keypad/Display Menu Structure

The following is a description of the MicroTech III menu structure. These menus and items can all be displayed with the keypad/ display. Menu items displayed will change based on the selected unit configuration.

Figure 4: Main Menu – Keypad/Display Menu Structure

Main Menu

Enter Password

Quick Menu

View/Set Unit

Unit State=_________

Unit Status=________

Ctrl Mode= Off

Occ Mode= Auto

Commission Unit

Manual Control

Service Menus

Trending

Unit Maintenance

BMS Communications

Unit Configuration

Alarm Lists

About This Unit

See page 6

Enter Password

Enter Password *******

See page 17 — 18

Quick Menu

Unit State=__________

Unit Status=_________

Dehum Status=______

Ctrl Mode= Off

Occ Mode= Auto/Net

Clg Capacity= XXX%

OAD/Econ Cap= XXX%

Htg Capacity= XXX%

Reheat Cap= XXX%

Control Temp= XXX%

Occ Clg Spt= 72 .0°F

Occ Htg Spt= 68 .0°F

Disch Air= XXX°F

DAT Clg Spt= 55 .0°F

DAT Htg Spt= 85 .0°F

Min DAT Limit= 55 .0°F

Unocc Clg Spt= 85 .0°F

Unocc Htg Spt= 55 .0°F

SAF Speed= XXX%

Duct Press= X .Xin

DuctSP Spt= 1 .0in

RF/EF Cap= XXX%

Bldg Press= X .XXin

BldgSP Spt= 0 .05in

IAQ PPM= XXXXppm

OA Flw= XXXXXCFM

MinOAFlw Spt= 2000CFM

OA Temp= XXX°F

EW Temp= XXX°F

Rel Humidity= XXX%

See page 19 — 28

View/Set Unit

Unit Status/Settings

Occupancy

Temperatures

Flow Status

SAF Spd Control

RF/EF Control

Cooling

Economizer

Min OA Damper

Heating

Dehumidification

Date/Time/Schedules

For more detail go to:

Figure 5, page 10

8

See page 63

BMS Communications

LON Set-Up

BACnet MSTP Set-Up

BACnet IP Set-Up

D-Net Set-Up

Network Unit Set-Up

For more detail go to:

Figure 8, page 16

See page 64

Unit Configuration

Apply Changes= No

Unit Type= RTU(0)

Control Type= DAT(1)

Clg Type= Comp(1)

Comp Config= 424(1)

Gen Clg Stgs= 8

Low Ambient= No(0)

Cond Ctrl= Std2(0)

OA Dmpr/Econ= AirEc(3)

OA Flow Stn= None(0)

Htg Type= None(0)

Htg Stages= 1

Max Heat Rise= 100

SAF Type= CAV(0)

RAF Type= CAV(0)

RF/EF Ctrl= Track(1)

2ndDSPSnsr= No(0)

EFT/LCT Snsr= No(0)

Energy Rcvy= None(0)

Clg Circ Type= 2Air(2)

Head P Ctrl= No(0)

Bypass Ctrl= Slave(0)

Unit Size= 050

Refrig Type= R410A(2)

Reheat Type= None(0)

Unit Voltage= 460/60(2)

See page 55

Alarm Lists

Active Alarms

Alarm Log

For more detail go to:

Figure 7, page 14

See page 71

About This Unit

SO_Item= 123456_12345

Unit SN= FBOU123456789

App Version= 2506017xxx

Cf1-15= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Cf6-29= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Main BSP= X .XX

LON BSP= X .XX

LON App Ver= X .XX

BACnet BSP= X .XX

D-Net BSP= X .XX

HMI GUID= xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx- xxxxxxxxxxxx

OBH GUID= xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx- xxxxxxxxxxxx

OM 1141-2

Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 29 — 51

Commission Unit

Unit Set-Up

Timer Settings

SAF Set-Up

RF/EF Set-Up

Htg/Clg ChgOvr Set-Up

Cooling Set-Up

Econo Set-Up

Min OA Set-Up

Heating Set-Up

Dehum Set-Up

Energy Rec Set-Up

Head Pressure Set-Up

Evap Cond Set-Up

Alarm Configuration

For more detail go to:

Figure 6, page 12

See page 52 — 54

Manual Control

Manual Control= Normal

Supply Fan= Off

SAF Spd Cmd= 0%

RF/EF Fan= Off

RF/EF Spd Cmd= 0%

OAD/Econo= 0%

OAD OpCl= Close

Comp 1= Off

Comp 2= Off

Comp 3= Off

Comp 4= Off

Comp 5= Off

Comp 6= Off

Comp 7= Off

Comp 8= Off

U1 Comp 1= Off

U1 Comp 2= Off

U2 Comp 1= Off

U2 Comp 2= Off

CFan Outpt 1= Off

CFan Outpt 2= Off

CFan Outpt 3= Off

BP/WR Valve= 0%

CW Valve= 0%

ExhFan Out 1= Off

ExhFan Out 2= Off

ECond VFD= Off

ECFan Spd Cmd= 0%

EC Dm Valve= Close

Sump Pump= Off

Sep Flsh Vlv= Off

SV1= Off

SV2= Off

Gas Htg On/Off= Off

Htg Valve= 0%

SCR Out= 0%

F&BP Damper= 0%

Htg Stg 1= Off

SCR Ena 1= Off

Htg Stg 2= Off

SCR Ena 2= Off

Htg Stg 3= Off

Htg Stg 4= Off

Htg Stg 5= Off

Htg Stg 6= Off

Reheat Valve= 0%

RH Output= Off

LSCRH Valve= Off

HGBP Valve= Off

ERec Wheel= Off

ER Whl Cmd= 0%

ERBP Dmpr Cl= Off

ERBP Dmpr Op= Off

Cond Wtr Pump= Off

Alm Output= Off

Fan Op Out= Off

See page 55 — 61

Service Menus

Timer Settings

Operating Hours

Save/Restore Settings

Active Alarms

Alarm Log

Alarm Configuration

Analog Input Status

Universal I/O Status

Digital Input Status

Digital Output Status

Network Input Status

Modbus Status

D3 Status

Sensor Offsets

Reset Counte= XXXX

For more detail go to:

Figure 7, page 14

See page 67

Trending

Trending Ena= No

Apply Chgs= No

Sample Time= 300s

TrendOnOff= Off

Export Data= No

Clear Trend= Done

Points 1–8 (Fixed)

Points 9–24 (from List)

Points 25–27 (with IDs)

Points 28–30 (with IDs)

For more detail go to:

Figure 9, page 16

See page 62

Unit Maintenance

Operating Hours

OM 1141-2 9

Keypad/Display Menu Structure

Figure 5: View/Set Unit – Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 19 — 28

View/Set Unit

Unit Status/Settings

Occupancy

Temperatures

Flow Status

SAF Spd Control

RF/EF Control

Cooling

Economizer

Min OA Damper

Heating

Dehumidification

Date/Time/Schedules

See page 19

Unit Status/Settings

Unit State= ___________

Unit Status= __________

Dehum Status= ________

Ctrl Mode= Off

Clg Status= ___________

Htg Status= ___________

Econo Status= _________

Clg Capacity= XXX%

Htg Capacity= XXX%

Reheat Cap= XXX%

SAF Speed= XXX%

RF/EF Cap= XXX%

OAD/Econo Cap=XXX%

Rel Humidiy= XXX%

Net Emrg Ovrd= Normal

Net App Mode= Auto

See page 21

Occupancy

Occupancy= __________

Occ Mode= Auto/Net

OccSrc= _____________

UnoccSrc= ___________

Tnt Ovrde Tm= 0 min

See page 22

Temperatures

Control Temp= XXX°F

Disch Temp= XXX°F

Return Air= XXX°F

Space Temp= XXX°F

OA Temp= XXX°F

EF/LC Temp= XXX°F

EW Temp= XXX°F

Mixed Air= XXX°F

ER LAT= XXX°F

ER EAT= XXX°F

Sump Temp= XXX°F

See page 23

Flow Status

Airflow= ______________

Waterflow= ___________

Water Pump= _________

Supply Fan= __________

Ret/Exh Fan= _________

See page 23 and 31

SAF Speed Control

SAF Speed= XXX%

Speed Cmd= XXX%

Duct Press= X .Xin

DuctSP Spt= 1 .0in

IAQ PPM= XXXXPPM

OA Flw= XXXXXCFM

MinOAFlw Spt= 2000CFM

Bldg Press= X .XXin

BldgSP Spt= 0 .05in

See page 24 and 34

RF/EF Control

RF/EF Cap= XXX%

Speed Cmd= XXX%

Bldg Press- X .XXin

BldgSP Spt= 0 .050in

10 OM 1141-2

Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 24 and 37

Cooling

Occ Clg Spt= 72 .0°F

Unocc Clg Spt= 85 .0°F

DAT Clg Spt= 55 .0°F

See page 24 and 38

Economizer

OAD/Econo Pos= XXX%

DAT Clg Spt= 55 .0°F

Min OA Pos= XXX%

Occ Clg Spt= 72 .0°F

Unocc Clg Spt= 85 .0°F

See page 25 and 40

Min OA Damper

Min OA Pos= XXX%

Vent Limit= 20%

LoFlo V Lmt= 30%

DCV Limit= 10%

Min OA Src= __________

See page 25 and 43

Heating

Occ Htg Spt= 68 .0°F

Unocc Htg Spt= 55 .0°F

MWU Spt= 70 .0°F

DAT Htg Spt= 85 .0°F

See page 26 and 45

Dehumidification

Dehum Status= ________

Rel Humidity= XXX%

Dewpoint= XXX°F

Dehum Method= None

RH Setpoint= 50%

Dewpoint Spt= 50°F

Reheat Spt= XXX°F

Reheat Cap= XXX%

See page 27 and 83

— 83

Date/Time/Schedules

Time= hh:mm:ss

Date= MM/DD/YY

UTC Diff= -60min

DAILY SCHEDULE

Mon= HH:MM-HH:MM

Tue= HH:MM-HH:MM

Wed= HH:MM-HH:MM

Thu= HH:MM-HH:MM

Fri= HH:MM-HH:MM

Sat= HH:MM-HH:MM

Sun= HH:MM-HH:MM

Hol= HH:MM-HH:MM

HOLIDAY DATES

Hol 1=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY

Hol 2=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY

Hol 3=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY

Hol 4=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY

Hol 5=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY

Hol 6=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY

Hol 7=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY

Hol 8=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY

Hol 9=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY

Hol 10=MMMDD/YY-MMMDD/YY

ONE EVENT SCHEDULE

Beg= MMMDD/YY@HH:MM

End= MMMDD/YY@HH:MM

OPTIMAL START

Enable= No

Htg Range= 0 .4 ºF/min

Htg OAT= 35 ºF

Des Htg OAT= 0 ºF

Clg Rate= 0 .4 ºF/min

Clg OAT= 85 ºF

Des Clg OAT= 95 ºF

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

DLS Strt Mon= Mar

DLS Strt Wk= 2nd Week

DLS End Mon= Nov

DLS End Wk= 1st Week

DLS Active= Yes

OM 1141-2 11

Keypad/Display Menu Structure

Figure 6: Commission Unit Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 29 — 51

Commission Unit

Unit Set-Up

Timer Settings

SAF Set-Up

RF/EF Set-Up

Htg/Clg ChgOvr Set-Up

Cooling Set-Up

Econo Set-Up

Min OA Set-Up

Heating Set-Up

Dehum Set-Up

Energy Rec Set-Up

Head Pressure Set-Up

Evap Cond Set-Up

Alarm Configuration

See page 29

Unit Set-Up

Apply Changes= No

Space Sensor= Digtl/Net

Eng Units= English

Unit Name= xxxxxxxxxxxx

Rapid Start= No

Rapid Start Tm= 10min

DO10 Clg= FanOp

See page 29

Timer Settings

Service Time= 0min

Start Up= 180s

Recirculate= 180s

Zero OA Time= 0min

Tnt Override= 120min

Post Heat= 0s

Pwd Timeout= 10min

Low DAT= 6min

ClgStateDelay= 300s

Clg Stg Time= 5min

Htg Stg Time= 5min

Air Flw Ign= 120s

MinExStrtTm= 120s

MinExStopTm= 120s

ER Whl Stg Tm= 5min

ER Whl Off Tm= 20min

Srvc Time Inc= 20s

OffHtCIDelay= 120s

See page 31

SAF Set-Up

SAF Ctrl= DSP

SPEED CONTROL

Rem SAF Cap= 25%

DSP CONTROL

DSP DB= 0 .1in

VFD Ramp Time= 60s

Min Period= 5s

Max Spd Chg= 15%

Duct Press 1= X .Xin

1 ZONE VAV CONTROL

Min Clg Spd= 40%

Max Clg Spd= 100%

Min Htg Spd= 40%

Max Htg Spd= 100%

Space Period= 30s

Space Gain= 1 .5

Space PAT= 100s

Space Max Chg= 10%

CO

2

CONTROL

Min PPM= 0PPM

Max PPM= 2000PPM

V/A @ Min PPM= 0V

V/A @ Max PPM= 10V

Min SAF PPM= 800PPM

BSP CONTROL

BSP DB= 0 .01in

BSP Period= 5s

BSP Gain= 0 .2

Max Spd Chg= 4%

SAF SETUP

Max SAF PPM= 1100PPM SAF Ctrl Dly= 30s

Min PPM Spd= 50%

Max PPM Spd= 100%

Min Speed= 25%

VAVBox Out= _________

CFM CONTROL

Min CFM= 0CFM

Max CFM= 10000CFM

V/A @ Min CFM= 0V

V/A @ Max CFM= 10 V

Max SAF Hz=

Max Vent Speed= 100%

Max SAF RPM= 2600

SAF CFM DB= 3%

SAF CFM Period= 30s

SAF CFM Gain= 0 .1

SAF CFM MxChg= 5%

12

See page 40 and 92

Min OA Set-Up

AplyMinOAChg= No

Min OA Reset= None

BSPOAOvrd= No

RstLmtSnsr= None

EXTERNAL RESET

OA @ MinV/mA= 0%

OA @ MaxV/mA= 100%

Min V/mA= 0 .0V

Max V/mA= 10 .0V

CO

2

RESET

IAQ Reset= Yes

PPM@DCVLmt= 800PPM

PPM@VntLmt= 1000PPM

IAQ PPM= XXXXPPM

Min PPM= 0 PPM

Max PPM= 2000 PPM

V/A @Min PPM= 0 .0/V

V/A @Max PPM= 10 .0/V

CFM RESET

OA Flow= XXXXXCFM

MinOAFlwSpt= 2000CFM

Field Stn Rst= Yes

Field Stn Cfg= VDC

Min CFM= 0 CFM

Max CFM= 10000 CFM

V/A @Min CFM= 0 .0V

V/A @Max CFM= 10 .0V

OA CFM DB= 3%

OA CFM Period= 30s

OA CFM Gain= 0 .1

OA CFM Max Chg= 5%

FAN SPEED RESET

Min Clg Spd= 40%

Des Clg Spd= 100%

BSP RESET

MinRFEFTm= 120s

BSP OvdST= 5s

BSP OvdGain= 0 .2

BSP OvdMaxChg= 4%

DAMPER LIMITING

RstTLmt= 32 .0ºF

RstTSmplTm= 5s

RstTGain= 0 .2

RstPAT= 60s

RstTMaxChg= 4%

0–30% OA Max= 30%

Min Inc Rate= 0 .03

Max Inc Rate= 1 .0

See page 43

Heating Set-Up

Htg Stage Time= 5min

Htg DB= 2 .0°F

Htg Period= 60s

Htg Gain= 0 .8

Htg PAT= 120s

Htg Max Chg= 10%

Htg Hi OAT Lk= 55 .0°F

OAT Diff= 2 .0°F

Htg Reset= None

Min Htg Spt= 55 .0°F

Min Htg Spt @= 0

Max Htg Spt= 120 .0°F

Max Htg Spt@= 100

Min DAT Ctrl= Yes

Min DAT Limit= 55 .0°F

F&BP Method= OpenVlv

F&BP ChgOvrT= 37°F

Occ Heating= Yes

Unocc Diff= 55 .0°F

Htg Wmup Tm= 60s

Htg Hld Period= 240s

Max Purge Hld= 20s

Gas Derate V= 10 .0v

MWUSensor= RAT

OM 1141-2

Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 34

RF/EF Set-Up

RF/EF Ctrl= None

Rem RAF Cap= 5%

Rem ExhF Cap= 5%

BSP DB= 0 .010in

BSP Period= 5s

BSP Gain= 0 .2s

Max Spd Chg= 4%

Sup Fan Max= 100%

RF @ SF Max= 95%

Sup Fan Min= 100%

RF @ SF Min= 95%

RFEF Ctrl Dly= 30s

Min Speed= 5/33%

(Exh Fan/Return Fan)

MinExStrtTm= 120s

MinExStopTm= 120s

MinExOAPos= 5%

MinExSAFCap= 10%

ExhOnOAPos= 40%

ExhMxOAPos= 100%

Exh Stg 1 On= 40%

Exh Stg 1 Off= 30%

Exh Stg 2 On= 55%

Exh Stg 2 Off= 40%

Exh Stg 3 On= 70%

Exh Stg 3 Off= 50%

Max Vent Spd= 100%

Max RFEF RPM= 2600

ECM Status= _________

See page 36

Htg/Clg ChgOvr Set-Up

Ctlr Temp Src= RAT

AplyTstatchg= No

Use Tstat Spt= No

Occ Clg DB= 2 .0°F

Clg Period= 60s

Clg Gain= 0 .1

Clg PAT= 600s

Max Clg Chg= 5 .0°F

Occ Htg DB= 2 .0°F

Htg Period= 60s

Htg Gain= 0 .1

Htg PAT= 600s

Max Htg Chg= 5 .0°F

See page 37

Cooling Set-Up

Clg Stage Time= 5min

Clg DB= 2 .0°F

Clg Period= 20s

Clg Gain= 1

Clg PAT= 40s

CW Max Chg= 15%

Clg Lo OAT Lk= 55ºF

OAT Diff= 2 .0°F

Min EWT= 55°F

Clg Reset= None

Min Clg Spt= 55 .0°F

Min Clg Spt @= 0

Max Clg Spt= 65 .0°F

Max Clg Spt@= 100

Lead Circuit= #1

Staging Type= Std

CFanOut1 Spt= 55°F

CFanOut2 Spt= 65°F

CFanOut3 Spt= 75°F

Cond Fan Diff= 5°F

See page 38

Econo Set-Up

Clg Stage Time= 5min

Chgover Temp= 65 .0°F

Clg DB= 2 .0°F

Econo Period= 30/40s

(air/water)

Econo Gain= 10/1

(air/water)

Econo PAT= 60/40s

(air/water)

Econo Max Chg= 10/15%

(air/water)

Flush Econo= Yes

Econo Diff= 2 .0°F

EWT Diff= 3 .0°F

Clg Reset= None

Min Clg Spt= 55 .0°F

Min Clg Spt @= 0

Max Clg Spt= 65 .0°F

Max Clg Spt@= 100

See page 45 and 87

Dehum Set-Up

Dehum Method= None

RH DB= 2%

Dewpoint DB= 2°F

RH Period= 30s

RH Gain= 1

RH PAT= 30s

RH Max Chg= 10%

RH Stg Time= 10min

Stg Rht DB= 5 .0°F

Dehum Ctrl= Occupied

Sensor Loc= Return

Mn Lvg Coil T= 45 .0°F

Mx Lvg Coil T= 52 .0°F

Min Rheat Spt= 55 .0°F

Max Rheat Spt= 65 .0°F

See page 38 and 77

Energy Rec Set-Up

Energy Rcvy= Yes

ER Wheel= ___________

Wheel Speed= XXX%

Whl Spd Cmd= XXX%

ER LAT= XXX°F

ER EAT= XXX°F

Min ExhT Diff= 2 .0°F

Max ExhT Diff= 6 .0°F

ER Whl Stg Tm= 5min

ER Whl Off Tm= 20min

Rel Humidity= XXX%

Min Whl Spd= 5%

Intersect Pt= XXX .XºF

Fst Mgnt Meth= Timed

OA Frst Temp= -5 .0°F

Defrost Time= 5min

Defrost Period= 60min

Defrst On Tm= 1s

Defrst Off Tm= 24s

ER Whl Period= 30s

ER Whl Gain= 1 .0

ER Whl PAT= 30s

ER Max Chg= 10%

See page 48

Head Pressure Set-Up

Wtr Reg Vlv= XXX%

Head P Circ 1= XXXPSI

Head P Circ 2= XXXPSI

Setpoint= 260PSI

Head Press DB= 10PSI

WRV Period= 10s

WRV Gain= 3 .6

WRV PAT= 10s

WRV Max Chg=7%

WRV Init Tm= 60s

Min WRV Pos=10%

Min WRV Tmp= 58°F

Max WRV Tmp= 150°F

WRV Act Time= 60s

Min WRV Time= 60s

See page 49

Evap Cond Set-Up

Cond Fan Spd= XXX%

CFan Spd Cmd= XXX%

Min Fan Speed= 25%

EvCond Stg Tm= 10min

Sump Temp= XXX°F

Min Sump T= 75 .0°F

Max Sump T= 85 .0°F

Sump Dump Spt= 35 .0°F

Cndtvy= XXXS/CM

Hi Cndtvy Spt= XXXS/CM

SmpWtrLvDly= 5min

PostClgTime= 10min

SepFlshtime= 1min

Dolphin Sys= No

See page 50

Alarm Configuration

ALARM LIMITS

Hi Disch Temp= 170°F

Lo Disch Temp= 40°F

Hi Return Temp= 120°F

ALARM OUT CONFIG

Faults= Fast

Problems= Slow

Warnings= Off

ALARM DELAYS

Frz Delay Time= 30s

LP Delay= 2s

LP Comp Delay= 5s

Air Flw Ing=120s

Sens Alm Dly= 30s

Temp AlmDly= 30s

ALARM CONFIG

Emerg Stop= ManClr

OM 1141-2 13

Keypad/Display Menu Structure

Figure 7: Service Menu Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 55 — 61

Service Menus

Timer Settings

Operating Hours

Save/Restore Settings

Active Alarms

Alarm Log

Alarm Configuration

Analog Input Status

Universal I/O Status

Digital Input Status

Digital Output Status

Network Input Status

Modbus Status

D3 Input Status

Sensor Offsets

Reset Counte= XXXX

See page 29

Timer Settings

Service Time= 0min

Start Up= 180s

Recirculate= 180s

Zero OA Time= 0min

Tnt Override= 120min

Post Heat= 0s

Pwd Timeout= 10min

Low DAT= 6min

ClgStateDelay= 300s

Clg Stg Time= 5min

Htg Stg Time= 5min

Air Flw Ign= 120s

MinExStrtTm= 120s

MinExStopTm= 120s

ER Whl Stg Tm= 5min

ER Whl Off Tm= 20min

Srvc Time Inc= 20s

OffHtCIDelay= 120s

See page 62

Operating Hours

Supply Fan= XXXXXh

Ret/Exh Fan= XXXXXh

Exh Out1= XXXXXh

Exh Out2= XXXXXh

Comp # 1= XXXXXh

Comp # 2= XXXXXh

Comp # 3= XXXXXh

Comp # 4= XXXXXh

Comp # 5= XXXXXh

Comp # 6= XXXXXh

Comp # 7= XXXXXh

Comp # 8= XXXXXh

Heating= XXXXXh

Economizer= XXXXXh

Tnt Override= XXXXXh

Dehumid= XXXXXh

ER Wheel= XXXXXh

See page 55

Save/Restore

Settings

Save Params= No

Rstr Params= No

Rstr Factory= No

SaveToCard= No

LoadFromCard= No

See page 55

Active Alarms

Alm Count: xx Clr Alms= No

+Alarm 1: Alarm Type

+Alarm 2: Alarm Type

+Alarm 10: Alarm Type

14

See page 59

Network Input Status

Net OAT In= XXX .XºF

Net Space In= XXX .XºF

NetCurrState= _________

NetNextState= _________

NetTmToNxtSt= XXXXXmin

Net App Mode= ________

Net Cl Ena Sw= X .X

Net Cl Ena VI= XXX%

Net Ht Ena Sw= X .X

Net Ht Ena VI= XXX%

Net Ec Ena Sw= X .X

Net Ec Ena VI= XXX%

Net SAF Cap= XXX%

Net ExhF Cap= XXX%

Net Space IAQ= XXXXPPM

Net Rel Humid= XXX%

Net DATClgSpt= XXX .XºF

Net DATHtgSpt= XXX .XºF nviSetpoint= XXX .XºF

OccManCmd= _________

Net Min OA= XXX% nvoEffSpt= XXX .XºF nciOccClgSpt= XXX .XºF nciOccHtgSpt= XXX .XºF nciHVACType= _________

See page 60

Modbus Status

SF MB Status=_________

RF/EF MB Status=______

ER MB Status=________

D3 MB Status=_________

MB Resistance= Yes

ECM Config= Done

See page 60

D3 Status

D3 Comm Sts= ________

D3 Addr Err= __________

D3 On/Off= ___________

D3 Mode= ____________

D3 Clg Spt= XXX .XºF

D3 Htg Spt= XXX .XºF

D3 Fan Spd= __________

D3 Min Load= XXX%

D3 Max Load= XXX%

D3 Eco Ena= __________

OA Enthalpy= XXXBTU/lb

OA Hum Ratio= g/kg

D3 SWVers= XXXXXXXXXX

OAAdd1–16= __________

OAAdd17–32= _________

OAAdd33–49= _________

OAAdd50–64= _________

SetOAAddr= XX

CurrOAAddr= XX

CurrOAAmps= XXXA

CurrOARLA= XXXA

See page 61

Sensor Offsets

Disch Air= 0 .0ºF

Return Air= 0 .0ºF

Space Temp= 0 .0ºF

OA Temp= 0 .0ºF

EF/LC Temp= 0 .0ºF

ER LAT= 0 .0ºF

ER EAT= 0 .0ºF

OM 1141-2

Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 56

Alarm Log

Log Count: xx Clr Log= No

+/-Alarm 1: Alarm Type

+/-Alarm 2: Alarm Type

+/-Alarm 10: Alarm Type

+/-Alarm 50: Alarm Type

See page 56

Alarm Configuration

ALARM LIMITS

Hi Disch Temp= 170°F

Lo Disch Temp= 40°F

Hi Return Temp= 120°F

ALARM OUT CONFIG

Faults= Fast

Problems= Slow

Warnings= Off

ALARM DELAYS

Frz Delay Time= 30s

LP Delay= 2s

LP Comp Delay= 5s

Air Flw Ing=120s

Sens Alm Dly= 30s

Temp AlmDly= 30s

ALARM CONFIG

Emerg Stop= ManClr

See page 56

Analog Input Status

MCB Al1= XXXXXXXX

MCB Al2= XXXXXXXX

MCB Al3= XXXXXXXX

See page 57

Universal I/O Status

MCB X1= XXXXXXXX

MCB X2= XXXXXXXX

MCB X3= XXXXXXXX

MCB X4= XXXXXXXX

MCB X5= XXXXXXXX

MCB X6= XXXXXXXX

MCB X7= XXXXXXXX

MCB X8= XXXXXXXX

EMB X1= XXXXXXXX

EMB X2= XXXXXXXX

EMB X3= XXXXXXXX

EMB X4= XXXXXXXX

EMB X5= XXXXXXXX

EMB X6= XXXXXXXX

EMB X7= XXXXXXXX

EMB X8= XXXXXXXX

EMD X1= XXXXXXXX

EMD X2= XXXXXXXX

EMD X3= XXXXXXXX

EMD X4= XXXXXXXX

EMD X5= XXXXXXXX

EMD X6= XXXXXXXX

EMD X7= XXXXXXXX

EMD X8= XXXXXXXX

See page 58

Digital Input Status

MCB DI1= ____________

MCB DI2= ____________

MCB DI3= ____________

MCB DI4= ____________

MCB DI5= ____________

MCB DI6= ____________

EMD DI1= ____________

See page 58

Digital Output Status

MCB DO1= __________

MCB DO2= __________

MCB DO3= __________

MCB DO4= __________

MCB DO5= __________

MCB DO6= __________

MCB DO7= __________

MCB DO8= __________

MCB DO9= __________

MCB DO10= __________

EMB DO1= __________

EMB DO2= __________

EMB DO3= __________

EMB DO4= __________

EMB DO5= __________

EMB DO6= __________

EMD DO1= __________

EMD DO2= __________

EMD DO3= __________

EMD DO4= __________

EMD DO5= __________

EMD DO6= __________

See page 55

Alarm Lists

Active Alarms

Alarm Log

See page 55

Active Alarms

Alm Count: xx Clr Alms= No

+Alarm 1: Alarm Type

+Alarm 2: Alarm Type

+Alarm 10: Alarm Type

See page 56

Alarm Log

Log Count: xx Clr Log= No

+/-Alarm 1: Alarm Type

+/-Alarm 2: Alarm Type

+/-Alarm 10: Alarm Type

+/-Alarm 50: Alarm Type

Alarm Details

+/-Alarm 1: Alarm Type

MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS

OM 1141-2 15

Keypad/Display Menu Structure

Figure 8: BMS Communications Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 63

BMS Communications

LON Set-Up

BACnet MSTP Set-Up

BACnet IP Set-Up

D-Net Set-Up

Network Unit Set-Up

IM 918

LON Set-Up

Neuron ID= xxxxxxxxxxxx

SndHrtBT= 60s

RcvHrtBT= 30s

MinSndTm= 0s

Comm Status=_________

LON BSP= X .XXX

LON App Ver= XXXX

IM 917

BACnet MSTP Set-Up

ApplyMSTPChgs= No

Name= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Dev Instance= xxxxxxxxxx

MSTP Address= XXX

Baud Rate= 76800

Max Master= 127

Max Info Frm= 10

Unit Support= English

Term Resistor= No

NC Dev 1= 0

NC Dev 2= 0

Comm Status= ________

BACnet BSP= X .X .XX

IM 916

BACnet IP Set-Up

ApplyIPChgs= No

Name= xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Dev Instance= xxxxxxxxxx

UDP Port= 47808

DHCP= On

Act IP= 0 .0 .0 .0

ActMsk- 0 .0 .0 .0

ActGwy= xxx .xxx .xxx .xxx

Gvn IP= 127 .0 .0 .1

GvnMsk= 255 .255 .255 .0

GvnGwy= 127 .0 .0 .1

Unit Support= English

NC Dev 1= 0

NC Dev 2= 0

Comm Status= ________

BACnet BSP= X .X .XX

D-Net Set-Up

ApplyD-NetChgs= No

DHCP= On

Act IP= 0 .0 .0 .0

ActMsk- 0 .0 .0 .0

ActGwy= xxx .xxx .xxx .xxx

Gvn IP= 127 .0 .0 .1

GvnMsk= 255 .255 .255 .0

GvnGwy= 127 .0 .0 .1

Remote Srv En= Disable

Comm Status= ________

D-net BSP= X .X .XX

See page 63

Network Unit Set-Up

Space Sensor= Local/Net

UNIT MODE SETTINGS

Ctrl Mode= Off

Occ Mode= Auto/net

RESET OPTIONS

Clg Reset= None

Htg Reset= None

Min OA Reset= None

Apply Changes= No

HEAT/COOL CHANGEOVER

Ctrl Temp SRC= RAT

Occ Clg Spt= 72°F

Occ Htg Spt= 68°F

FAN CONTROL OPTIONS

SAF Ctlr= DSP

RF/EF Ctlr= Tracking

Figure 9: Trending Keypad/Display Menu Structure

See page 67

Trending

Trending Ena= No

Apply Chgs= No

Sample Time= 300s

TrendOnOff= Off

Export Data= No

Clear Trend= Done

Points 1–8 (Fixed)

Points 9–24 (from List)

Points 25–27 (with IDs)

Points 28–30 (with IDs)

Points 1–8 (Fixed)

Point 1= UnitSt

Point 2= Clg%

Point 3= Htg%

Point 4= SAF%

Point 5= OAD/Eco%

Point 6= CtrlTmp

Point 7= DAT

Point 8= OAT

Points 9–24 (from List)

Point 9= None

Point 10= None

Point 11= None

Point 12= None

Point 13= None

Point 14= None

Point 15= None

Point 16= None

Point 17= None

Point 18= None

Point 19= None

Point 20= None

Point 21= None

Point 22= None

Point 23= None

Point 24= None

Points 25–27 (with IDs)

Point 25

ID= F0AF0000

Type= 0000

Mem Num= 0100

Point 26

ID= F0AF0000

Type= 0000

Mem Num= 0100

Point 27

ID= F0AF0000

Type= 0000

Mem Num= 0100

Points 28–30 (with IDs)

Point 28

ID= F0AF0000

Type= 0000

Mem Num= 0100

Point 29

ID= F0AF0000

Type= 0000

Mem Num= 0100

Point 30

ID= F0AF0000

Type= 0000

Mem Num= 0100

16 OM 1141-2

Quick Menu

Items in the Quick Menu contain basic unit operating status and control set point parameters. The items shown in the

Quick Menu are Read Only if a valid password has not been entered. The following are brief descriptions of the Quick

Menu items. No password is required to view the Quick

Menu.

Table 1: Quick Menu

Menu Display Name Default Setting

Unit State= —

Unit Status=

Dehum Status=

Ctrl Mode=

Occ Mode=

Clg Capacity=

OAD/Econo Cap=

Htg Capacity=

Reheat Capacity=

Control Temp=

Occ Clg Spt =

Occ Htg Spt =

Disch Air=

DAT Clg Spt=

DAT Htg Spt=

Min DAT Limit=

SAF Capacity=

DSP

DuctSP Spt=

RF/EF Capacity=

BSP=

BldgSP Spt=

OA Temp=

EW Temp=

Rel Humidity=

Off

Auto/Net

55 .0°F

85 .0°F

55 .0°F

1 .0 in

72 .0°F

68 .0°F

0 .050 in

0–100%

-50 .0–200 .0°F

0 .0–100 .0°F

0 .0–100 .0°F

-50 .0–250 .0°F

40 .0–100 .0°F

40 .0–140 .0°F

0 .0–70 .0°F

0–100%

0 .2–4 .0 in

0 .2–4 .0 in

0–100%

-0 .25–0 .25 in

-0 .25–0 .25 in

-50 .0–200 .0°F

-50 .0–150 .0°F

0–100%

Active/Inactive

Off

HeatOnly

CoolOnly

FanOnly

HeatCool

Auto/Net

Occ

Unocc

TntOvrd

Auto/Net

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

Range

Off

Start

Recirc

FanOnly

MinDAT

Htg

Econo

Clg

Enable

OffMan

OffMnCtl

OffNet

OffAlm

OffFnRty

Menu Descriptions

Menu Descriptions

Password Level

None

6

6

6

6

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

OM 920-4 17

Menu Descriptions

Menu Descriptions

Unit State

is a status only item which indicates the state of operation in which the unit is currently operating. The unit can be in any of the operating states shown.

Unit Status

is a status only item which indicates the status of operation in which the unit is currently operating. The unit status can be any of the status values shown.

Dehum Status

is a status only item which indicates the status of operation of the dehumidifier. The dehumidifier can be active or inactive.

Ctrl Mode

is an adjustable item which sets the operating mode of the unit. The unit can be in any of the modes shown.

Occ Mode

is an adjustable item which sets the occupancy mode of the unit. The unit can be in occupied, unoccupied, tenant override, or auto modes.

Clg Capacity

is a status only item which indicates the percentage of the unit maximum cooling capacity currently operating.

OAD/Econo Cap

is a status only item which indicates the percentage that the outdoor damper or economizer valve is currently open.

Htg Capacity

is a status only item which indicates the percentage of the unit maximum heating capacity currently operating.

Reheat Capacity

is a status only item which indicates the percentage of the unit maximum reheat capacity currently operating.

Control Temp

is a status only item which displays the current value of the “Control Temperature.” The “Control

Temperature” is defined as the temperature input selected by the Control Temperature Source parameter. For example, if the Control Temperature Source parameter is set to “Return,” then the control temperature parameter reads the same value as the Return Air parameter.

Occ Clg Spt

is a status only item which indicates the temperature in which the unit will go into the cooling mode of operation. Once a valid password has been entered this item becomes an adjustable item.

Occ Htg Spt

is a status only item which indicates the temperature in which the unit will go into the heating mode of operation. Once a valid password has been entered this item becomes an adjustable item.

Disch Air

is a status only item which displays the current temperature reading from the unit’s discharge air temperature sensor (DAT). This sensor is standard on all units.

DAT Clg Spt

is a status only item which indicates the temperature that the DAT should be maintained at when it is in the cooling mode of operation. Once a valid password has been entered this item becomes an adjustable item.

DAT Htg Spt

is a status only item which indicates the temperature that the DAT should be maintained at when in the heating mode of operation. Once a valid password has been entered this item becomes an adjustable item.

Min DAT Limit

is a status only item which indicates the discharge air low limit temperature on CAV zone control units. Heating will be activated to maintain this setting when the discharge temperature falls below it during the Fan Only operating state. On VAV or CAV discharge control units, the minimum discharge temperature limit is the DAT Clg Spt.

Once a valid password has been entered this item becomes an adjustable item.

SAF Capacity

is a status only item which indicates the capacity of the supply air fan.

DSP

is a status only item which displays the current duct static pressure reading.

DuctSP Spt=

is a status only item which indicates the duct static pressure set point used for controlling the VFD for the supply air fan. The VFD is modulated to maintain the duct pressure at this value. Once a valid password has been entered this item becomes an adjustable item.

RF/EF Capacity

is a status only item indicating the capacity of the return fan/exhaust air fans.

BSP

is a status only item which displays the current building static pressure reading.

BldgSP Spt

is a status only item which indicates the building static pressure set point used for controlling the return/ exhaust fan VFD. The return/exhaust fan VFD is modulated to maintain the building static pressure sensor input to this value. Once a valid password has been entered this item becomes an adjustable item.

OA Temp

is a status only item which displays the current temperature reading from the unit mounted outdoor air temperature sensor. This sensor is standard on all units.

EW Temp

is a status only item that displays the current temperature reading from the unit mounted entering water temperature sensor. The sensor is standard on all watercooled units.

Rel Humidity

is a status only item that displays the current relative humidity reading from the optional humidity sensor.

18 OM 920-4

View/Set Unit Menus

Unit Status Settings

The “Unit Status Settings” menu provides a summary of basic unit status and control items. This menu summarizes the current operating state of the unit, giving the operating state the unit is in, along with the current capacity level of that operating state.

Table 2: Unit Status/Settings

Item Display Name Default Setting

Unit State= —

Unit Status=

Dehum Status

Ctrl Mode=

Clg Status=

Htg Status=

Econo Status=

Clg Capacity=

Htg Capacity=

Reheat Cap

SAF Capacity=

RF/EF Capacity=

Rel Humidity=

Net Emrg Ovrd=

Net App Mode=

Off

Normal

Auto

Active/Inactive

Off

HeatOnly

CoolOnly

FanOnly

HeatCool

Auto

Enabled

None

OffAmb

OffAlarm

OffNet

OffMan

Enabled

None

OffAmb

OffAlarm

OffNet

OffMan

Range

Off

Start

Recirc

FanOnly

MinDAT

Htg

Econo

Clg

Enable

OffMan

OffMnCtl

OffNet

OffAlm

OffFnRty

Enabled

None

OffAmb

OffAlarm

OffNet

OffMan

OffDehum

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

Normal, Off

Off

HeatOnly

CoolOnly

FanOnly

Auto

Menu Descriptions

Password Level

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

OM 920-4 19

Menu Descriptions

Unit State

is a status only item which indicates the state of operation in which the unit is currently operating. The unit can be in any of the operating states shown.

Unit Status

is a status only item which indicates the status of operation in which the unit is currently operating. The unit status can be any of the status values shown.

Dehum Status

is a status only item which indicates the status of operation of the dehumidifier. The dehumidifier can be active or inactive.

Ctrl Mode

is an adjustable item which sets the operating mode of the unit. The unit can be in any of the modes shown.

Clg Status

is a status only item which indicates whether or not mechanical cooling is currently allowed. If cooling is disabled, the reason is indicated.

Htg Status

is a status only item which indicates whether or not heating is currently allowed. If heating is disabled, the reason is indicated.

Econo Status

is a status only item which indicates whether or not the economizer is currently enabled. If economizer is enabled, the reason is indicated.

Clg Capacity

is a status only item which indicates the percentage of the unit maximum cooling capacity currently operating.

Htg Capacity

is a status only item which indicates the percentage of the unit maximum heating capacity currently operating.

Reheat Capacity

is a status only item which indicates the percentage of the unit maximum reheat capacity currently operating.

SAF Capacity

is a status only item which indicates the capacity of the supply air fan.

RF/EF Capacity

is a status only item indicating the capacity of the return fan/exhaust air fans.

Rel Humidity

is a status only item that displays the current relative humidity reading from the optional humidity sensor.

Net Emrg Ovrd

is an adjustable item which indicates if the unit was shut down in an emergency situation via a network command.

Net App Mode

is a network adjustable item which indicates that the unit is set for network off, cooling only, heating only, fan only or auto heating/cooling operation via a network signal. This item has no affect on the unit operation unless the

Ctrl Mode item is set to “Auto.”

20 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Occupancy Menu

Menus in the Occupancy menu contain status and control items that relate to unit occupied/unoccupied operation.

Table 3: Occupancy Menu

Item Display Name

Occupancy=

Default Setting

Occ Mode=

OccSrc=

UnoccSrc=

Auto/Net

-

-

Tnt Ovrde Time= 0

Occupancy

is a status only item which indicates whether the unit is currently in an occupied, unoccupied, or tenant override mode of operation.

OccMode

is an adjustable item which allows the unit to be set for manual occupied or unoccupied operation, automatic operation based on a time schedule input or manual tenant override operation.

OccSrc

is a status only item which indicates the input source or function that is responsible for setting the Occupancy parameter to “Occ” or “TntOvrd.”

Range

Occ

Unocc

TntOvrd

Occ

Unocc

TntOvrd

Auto/Net

None

NetSchd

IntSchd

OneEvnt

RemoteSw

OccManCmd

OccMode

TStatTO

ManTO

UnoccDehum

UnoccClg

UnoccHtg

IntOptStrt

NetOptStrt

None

0–300min

Password Level

6

6

6

6

6

UnoccSrc

is a status only item which indicates the input source or function that is responsible for running the unit while the Occupancy parameter to “Unocc.”

Tnt Ovrd Time

is an adjustable item which indicates the amount of time remaining for unit operation since tenant override operation was activated.

OM 920-4 21

Menu Descriptions

Temperatures Menu

Menus in the Temperatures menu contain unit temperature status information.

Table 4: Temperature Menu

Item Display Name

Control Temp=

Disch Air=

Return Air=

Space Temp=

OA Temp=

EF/LC Temp=

EW Temp=

Mixed Air=

ER LAT

ER EAT

Sump Temp

PA Temp

Default Setting

Range

-50 .0–200 .0°F

-50 .0–250 .0°F

-20 .0–200 .0°F

-0 .0–150 .0°F

-50 .0–200 .0°F

-50 .0–250 .0°F

-50 .0–150 .0°F

-50 .0–250 .0°F

-50 .0–200 .0°F

-50 .0–200 .0°F

-50 .0–150 .0°F

-50 .0–200 .0°F

Password Level

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

2

Control Temp

is a status only item which indicates the current Control Temperature value.

Disch Air

is a status only item which displays the current temperature reading from the unit’s discharge air temperature sensor (DAT). This sensor is standard on all units.

Return Air

is a status only item which displays the current temperature reading from the unit’s return air temperature sensor (RAT).

Space Temp

is a status only item which displays the current space (or zone) temperature reading from the optional unit space air temperature sensor input. If an optional space temperature sensor is not installed and space temperature value is not supplied by a network, the SpaceT Present= item in the Setup menu should be set to “No” to disable the alarm function associated with an open circuit at the space temperature sensor input.

OA Temp

is a status only item which displays the current temperature reading from the unit mounted outdoor air temperature sensor.

EF/LC Temp

is a status only item which displays the current entering fan/leaving coil temperature reading from the unit mounted temperature sensor. This sensor is available on RTU units with dehumidification capability. This sensor is also installed on RTU units equipped with either gas or electric heat and is used by the controller to calculate the heat rise across the heat exchanger by comparing it to the discharge air temperature input. The controller uses this information to protect the heat exchanger against overheating.

EW Temp

is a status only item that displays the current temperature reading from the unit mounted entering water temperature sensor. The sensor is standard on all watercooled units.

Mixed Air

is a status only item that displays the current temperature reading from the unit mounted mixed air temperature sensor. The sensor is standard on all Self

Contained units.

ER LAT

is status only item which displays the current discharge air temperature leaving the optional energy recovery wheel.

ER Exh T

is status only item which displays the current exhaust air temperature leaving the optional energy recovery wheel.

Sump Temp

is a status only item that displays the current evaporative condenser sump temperature.

22 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Flow Status Menu

Table 5: Flow Status Menu

Item Display Name

Airflow=

Waterflow=

Water Pump=

Supply Fan=

Default Setting

Airflow

is a status only item that indicates whether or not discharge airflow is detected. Airflow status is sensed by a binary input delivered to the controller by a differential pressure switch (PC7). On VAV units duct static pressure is also a factor in the indication of airflow.

Waterflow

is a status only item that indicates whether or not water flow is detected on a water cooled unit. Water flow status is sensed by a binary input delivered to the controller by an optional water flow sensor (WF1) or from a network supplied water flow input.

Water pump

is a status only item that indicates whether or not the Pump Start Output is active on a water cooled unit.

The pump start output is available for field use to start a field

SAF Spd Control Menu

Table 6: Supply Fan Speed Menu

Item Display Name

SAF Speed=

Speed Cmd=

Duct Press=

DuctSP Spt=

IAQ PPM =

OA Flow =

Bldg Press =

BldgSP Spt

Default Setting

1 .0 in

SAF Speed

is a status only item that indicates the current supply fan speed.

Speed Cmd

is a status only item that indicates the current supply fan VFD commanded speed.

Duct Press

is a status only item which indicates the current pressure of the supply air ductwork. The duct pressure is measured at the location in which the duct static pressure tap was field installed. This device is not factory installed.

DuctSP SPT

is an adjustable item which sets the duct static pressure set point used for controlling the VFD for the supply air fan. The VFD is modulated to maintain the duct pressure at this value.

IAQ PPM =

is a status only item that indicates the current CO

2 level when the supply fan control method is set to CO

Note: CO

2 the unit control type set to Zone or DAC.

2

.

option only available on 100% OA units that have

Range

NoFlow

Flow

NoFlow

Flow

Off

On

Off

On

Password Level

6

6

6

6 supplied pump when water flow is required. For field wiring requirements for using this output refer to “Field Wiring” in the MicroTech III Installation Manual (IM 919). The Pump

Start Output is turned on whenever the economizer bypass valve is open, the unit is in the Econo or Cooling operating state, economizer flush mode is active or a Freeze fault or

Freeze problem alarm is active or has been active within the past 10 minutes. Otherwise the Pump Start Output is off.

Supply Fan

is a status only item which indicates whether or not the controller is commanding the unit supply fan on.

Ret/Exh Fan

is a status only item which indicates whether or not the controller is commanding the unit RF/EF fan on.

Range

0–100%

0–100%

0 .0–5 .0 in

0 .2–4 .0 in

Password Level

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

OA Flow =

is a status only item that indicates the current

CFM value when the supply fan control method is set to

CFM. Note:

CFM option only available on 100% OA units that have the unit control type set to Zone or DAC.

Bldg Press =

is a status only item which indicates the current building static pressure when the supply fan control method is set to BSP. Note:

BSP option only available on 100% OA units that have the unit control type set to Zone or DAC.

BldgSP Spt

is an adjustable item which sets the building static pressure set point used for controlling the VFD when the supply fan control method is set to BSP. Note: BSP option only available on 100% OA units that have the unit control type set to Zone or DAC.

OM 920-4 23

Menu Descriptions

RF/EF Control Menu

Table 7: Return/Exhaust Fan Speed Menu

Item Display Name

RF/EF Speed=

Speed Cmd=

Bldg Press=

BldgSP Spt=

Default Setting

-

-

-

0 .050 in

RF/EF Speed

is a status only item that indicates the current return/exhaust fan VFD speed.

Speed Cmd

is a status only item that indicates the current return/exhaust fan VFD commanded speed.

Bldg Press

is a status only item which indicates the building static pressure at the building static pressure sensor location.

Cooling Menu

Table 8: Cooling Menu

Item Display Name

Occ Clg Spt =

Unocc Clg Spt=

DAT Clg Spt=

Default Setting

72 .0°F

85 .0°F

55 .0°F

Occ Clg Spt

an adjustable item which sets the temperature above which the unit will go into the cooling mode of operation.

Unocc Clg Spt

is an adjustable item which sets the zone temperature above which the unit starts up and provides unoccupied cooling (night setup) during unoccupied periods.

NOTE:

Setting this to its maximum value will disable unoccupied cooling .

Range

0–100%

0–100%

-0 .25–0 .25 in

-0 .25–0 .25 in

Password Level

6

6

6

6

BldgSP Spt

is an adjustable item which sets the building static pressure set point used for controlling the VFD for the return/exhaust air fan. The VFD is modulated to maintain the building pressure at this value.

Range

0 .0–100 .0°F

40 .0–100 .0°F

40 .0–100 .0°F

Password Level

6

6

6

DAT Clg Spt

is an adjustable item used by the controller to set the DAT cooling setpoint. This value is adjustable only on

DAC units when it is not being set by a reset schedule. It is not adjustable on CAV units.

Economizer Menu

Table 9: Economizer Menu

Item Display Name

OAD/Econo Pos=

DAT Clg Spt=

Min OA Pos=

Occ Clg Spt =

Unocc Clg Spt=

Default Setting

55 .0°F

72 .0°F

85 .0°F

Range

0–100%

40 .0–100 .0°F

0–100%

0 .0–100 .0°F

40 .0–100 .0°F

Password Level

6

6

6

6

6

OAD/Econo Pos

is a status only item that is used to indicate percentage that the economizer dampers/waterside economizer valve is open.

DAT Clg Spt

is an adjustable item used by the controller to set the DAT cooling setpoint. This value is adjustable only on

DAC units when it is not being set by a reset schedule. It is not adjustable on CAV units.

Min OA Pos

is a status only item which indicates the current minimum position of the outdoor air damper.

Occ Clg Spt

an adjustable item which sets the temperature above which the unit will go into the cooling mode of operation.

Unocc Clg Spt

is an adjustable item which sets the zone temperature above which the unit starts up and provides unoccupied cooling (night setup) during unoccupied periods.

NOTE:

Setting this to its maximum value will disable unoccupied cooling .

24 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Min OA Damper Menu

Table 10: Min OA Damper Menu

Item Display Name

Min OA Pos=

Vent Limit=

LoFlo V Lmt=

DCV Limit=

Min OA SCR=

Default Setting

-

20%

30%

10%

Min OA Pos

is a status only item which indicates the current minimum position of the outdoor damper. This value does not go above a value called the Ventilation Limit and does not go below a value called the Demand Control Ventilation Limit.

On CAV units the Ventilation Limit and the Demand Control

Ventilation Limit are fixed values set equal to the Vent

Limit= and DCV Limit= parameters. On VAV units the OA

Damper Position increases from the Vent Limit= value to the LoFloVent Limit= value as the VFD speed goes from

100% down to the Min Clg Spd= value. The Demand Control

Ventilation Limit in this VAV case is determined by the

Ventilation Limit X DVC Limit=/Vent Limit=. When the

Min OA Reset= parameter is set to “None” the Min OA Pos= value is set to the Ventilation Limit. If Min OA Reset= is set to Network, Ext VDC, Ext mA, IAQ VDC, or IAQ mA, the

Min OA Pos= varies between the Ventilation Limit and the

Demand Control Ventilation Limit as the reset signal varies from its maximum to minimum value.

Range

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

VentLmt

DesFlw

FldFlw

Network

Ext VDC

Ext mA

IAQ VDC

BSPOvrd

FanDiff

DCVLmt

ZeroOA

Password Level

6

6

6

6

4

Vent Limit

is an adjustable item that sets the value of the

Ventilation Limit on a CAV unit or when a VAV unit is at

100% discharge fan speed.

LoFlo Vent Limit

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum value for the Ventilation Limit on a VAV unit. The ventilation limit is raised toward this value as the discharge fan speed decreases toward the Min Clg Spd value.

DCV Limit

is an adjustable item that sets the value of the

Demand Control Ventilation Limit on a CAV unit or when a

VAV unit is at 100% discharge fan speed. This item is only used when the “Min OA Reset=” is set to something other than “None.”

Min OA Src =

is a status only item that indicates the action that is winning for control of the OA damper position.

Heating Menu

The Heating menu provides a summary of the control parameters for units with heating. The unit’s heating mode of operation is controlled by the control temperature and the heating setpoint temperature. The unit goes into the heating mode of operation by analyzing the control temperature.

Table 11: Heating Menu

Item Display Name

Occ Htg Spt =

Unocc Htg Spt=

MWU Spt=

DAT Htg Spt=

Default Setting

68 .0°F

55 .0°F

70 .0°F

85 .0°F

Occ Htg Spt

is an adjustable item which sets the control temperature below which the unit will go into the heating mode of operation.

Unocc Htg Spt

is an adjustable item which sets the zone temperature below which the unit starts up and provides unoccupied heating (night setback) during unoccupied periods.

The control temperature can be return temperature, space temperature or outside air temperature. The unit goes into the heating mode of operation when the control temperature is below the heating setpoint by more than ½ the deadband.

Range

0 .0–100 .0°F

40 .0–100 .0°F

40 .0–100 .0°F

40 .0–140 .0°F

Password Level

6

6

6

6

MWU Spt

is an adjustable item which sets the heating setpoint to be used during morning warm up on a discharge temperature control unit. CAV units use the Occ Htg Spt for morning warmup operation.

DAT Htg Spt

is an adjustable parameter which sets the heating discharge set point.

OM 920-4 25

Menu Descriptions

Dehumidification Menu

Table 12:

Dehumidification Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting

Dehum Status=

Rel Humidity=

Dewpoint=

Dehum Method=

None

Always

RH Setpoint=

Dewpoint Spt=

Reheat Spt=

Reheat Cap=

50%

50°F

Dehum Status

is a status only item that indicates whether dehumidification is enabled or disabled.

Rel Humidity

is a status only item that indicates the current relative humidity reading of the sensor.

DewPoint

is a status only item that indicates the current dew point value that is calculated by the controller using the

Rel Humidity= value and either the Space Temp= or Return

Air= value, depending on the setting of the Humidity Sensor

Location. This parameter can either be set to “Space” or

“Return.”

Dehum Method

is an adjustable item used to set the dehumidification method to either “RH” or “DewPt.” When this parameter is set to “RH,” dehumidification operation is controlled to maintain the Rel Humidity= value at the

RH Setpoint=. When this parameter is set to “DewPt,” dehumidification operation is controlled to maintain the Dew

Point value at the Dewpoint Spt=. When this parameter is set to “Always” dehumidification will be active as long as mechanical cooling is not disabled.

Range

Disabled

Enabled

0–100%

-50–150°F

None

Rel Hum

DewPt

0–100%

0–100°F

40 .0–100 .0°F

0–100%

Password Level

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

RH Setpoint

is an adjustable item used to set the relative humidity value at which the relative humidity will be controlled to during dehumidification operation.

Dewpoint Spt

is an adjustable item used to set the dewpoint value at which the dewpoint with will be controlled to during dehumidification operation.

Reheat Spt

is a status only item which is used to indicate the DAT temperature to which the HGRH valve will be controlled in the Cooling and Fan Only operating states while dehumidification operation is active. The Reheat Spt= equals the DAT Cooling Setpoint for DAT controlled units and will vary in between the Min Reheat Spt= and Max Reheat Spt= for Zone Controlled units.

Reheat Cap

is a status only item that indicates the current reheat capacity value.

26 OM 920-4

Date/Time/Schedules Menu

Time/Date

Table 13: Time/Date

Item Display Name

Time=

Date=

UTC Diff=

Default Setting

Time

is an adjustable item that sets the current time.

Date

is an adjustable item that sets the current date.

UTC Diff

is an adjustable parameter that can be set to indicate how the local time where the unit is situated differs from the

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

Daily Schedule Menu

The Daily Schedule sets the start and stop times for each of the days of the week. One start and one stop time can be set for each day.

Table 14: Daily Schedule Menu

Item Display Name

Mon=

Tue=

Wed=

Thu=

Fri=

Sat=

Sun=

Hol=

Default Setting

HH:MM — HH:MM

HH:MM — HH:MM

HH:MM — HH:MM

HH:MM — HH:MM

HH:MM — HH:MM

HH:MM — HH:MM

HH:MM — HH:MM

HH:MM — HH:MM

Holiday Schedule Menu

The Holiday Schedule is used to set the start and stop times for up to 10 different holidays.

Table 15: Holiday Schedule Menu

Item Display Name

Hol 1=

Hol 2=

Hol 3=

Hol 4=

Hol 5=

Hol 6=

Hol 7=

Hol 8=

Hol 9=

Hol 10=

Default Setting

MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99

MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99

MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99

MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99

MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99

MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99

MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99

MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99

MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99

MMMDD/99–MMMDD/99

Range

HH:MM:SS

MM/DD/YYYY

Range

00:00 — 23:59

00:00 — 23:59

00:00 — 23:59

00:00 — 23:59

00:00 — 23:59

00:00 — 23:59

00:00 — 23:59

00:00 — 23:59

Range

00/00/00–12/31/99

00/00/00–12/31/99

00/00/00–12/31/99

00/00/00–12/31/99

00/00/00–12/31/99

00/00/00–12/31/99

00/00/00–12/31/99

00/00/00–12/31/99

00/00/00–12/31/99

00/00/00–12/31/99

Menu Descriptions

Password Level

6

6

6

Password Level

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

Password Level

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

OM 920-4 27

Menu Descriptions

One Event Schedule Menu

The One Event Schedule is used to set the start and stop times for one event.

Table 16: One Event Schedule Menu

Item Display Name

Beg=

End=

Optimal Start Menu

Default Setting

MMMDD/99 @ HH:MM

MMMDD/99 @ HH:MM

Range

00/00/00-12/31/99 @ 00:00 – 23:59

00/00/00-12/31/99 @ 00:00 – 23:59

Password Level

6

6

The Optimal Start menu is used to set up the unit so it starts at the most efficient time before building occupancy.

Table 17: Optimal Start Menu

Item Display Name

Enable=

Htg Rate=

Htg OAT=

Des Htg OAT=

Clg Rate=

Clg OAT=

Des Clg OAT=

Default Setting

No

0 .4°F/min

35°F

0°F

0 .4°F/min

85°F

95°F

Enable

is an adjustable item that turns on the optimal start feature. Setting the value to yes will activate this function.

Htg Rate

is an adjustable item used by the controller in determining the amount time before occupancy to start when the Optimal Start parameter is set to “On.”

Htg OAT

is an adjustable item used by the controller in determining the amount time before occupancy to start when the Optimal Start parameter is set to “On.”

Design Htg OAT

is an adjustable item that sets the outdoor air temperature at which the heating system could just hold the load. The rate of temperature rise would equal zero.

Clg Rate

Range

No, Yes

0 .0–1 .0°F/min

-40–60°F

-40–60°F

0 .0–1 .0°F/min

-60–140°F

-60–140°F

Password Level

6

2

2

2

2

2

2

is an adjustable item that sets the rate of temperature drop in degrees per minute when the unit last started optimally in cooling.

Clg OAT

is an adjustable item that sets the outdoor air temperature when the unit was last started optimally in cooling.

Design Clg OAT

is an adjustable item that sets the outdoor air temperature at which the cooling system could just hold the load. Rate of temperature rise would equal zero.

Daylight Savings Menu

Table 18: Daylight Savings Menu

Item Display Name

DLS Strt Mon=

DLS Strt Wk=

DLS End Mon=

DLS End Week=

Default Setting

Mar

2ndWeek

Nov

1stWeek

Range

NA

Jan-Dec

1stSun

2ndSun

3rdSun

4thSun

5thSun

NA

Jan-Dec

1stSun

2ndSun

3rdSun

4thSun

5thSun

Off/Auto

Password Level

2

2

2

2

2 DLS Enable= Auto

DLS Strt Mon

is an adjustable item that sets the month for daylight savings time to begin.

DLS Strt Wk

is an adjustable item that sets the week of the month for daylight savings time to begin.

DLS End Mon

is an adjustable item that sets the month for daylight savings time to end.

DLS End Week

is an adjustable item that sets the week of the month for daylight savings time to end.

DLS Enable

is an adjustable item that sets whether or not daylight savings time is enabled.

28 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Commission Unit

Unit Setup

Table 19: Unit Setup Menu

Item Display Name

Apply Changes=

RAT Sensor=

OAT Sensor=

Space Sensor

Default Setting

No

Yes

Yes

Digtl/Net

Eng Units=

Unit Name=

Rapid Start=

Rapid Start Tm=

DO10 Cfg=

English

No

10 min

FanOp

100% OA SCU

is an adjustable item used to select whether or not a self contained unit will be configured for 100% outside air operation.

Space Sensor

is an adjustable item to indicate if a space sensor is connected to the unit controller, or provided via a network signal.

Eng Units

is an adjustable item to indicate if the unit is to display English or Metric units of measure.

Range

No, Yes

No, Yes

No, Yes

None

Anlog/Net

Digtl/Net

English, SI

No, Yes

0–20 min

FanOp

VAVBox

Password Level

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

2

2

Unit Name

is an adjustable item that allows each controller to be given a unique name. This may be useful when multiple units are connected to a single remote HMI.

Rapid Start

is an adjustable item that allows the user to select to initiate a rapid startup sequence at unit power up.

Rapid Start Tm

is an adjustable item that allows the user to set the Rapid Start timing whenever the power is reset to the controller and the controller finishes its startup sequence.

DO10 Cfg

is an adjustable item that redefines the functionality of the digital output (DO10) on the main control board. The output is either a supply fan operation indication or a VAV box signal depending on how this parameter is set.

Timer Settings Menu

Table 20: Timer Settings Menu

Item Display Name

Service Time

Start Up

Recirculate

Zero OA Time

Tnt Override

Post Heat

Pwd Timeout

Low DAT

ClgStateDelay

Clg Stg Time

Htg Stg Time

Min Ex Strt Tm

Min Ex Stop Tm

ER Whl Stg Tm

ER Whl Off Tm

Air Flw Ign

Htg Wrmup Tm

Htg Hld Period

Srvc Time Inc

Off HtCl Delay

Default Setting

6 min

300s

5 min

5 min

120s

120s

5 min

0 min

180s

180s

0 min

120 min

0s

10 min

5 min

120s

240s

240s

20s

120s

Range

0–240min

1800s

3600s

0–240min

0–300min

0–180s

3–30min

0–60min

0–600s

5–60min

2–60min

60–300s

60–300s

1–100min

1–100min

0–999S

0–999s

0–999s

0–300s

0–999s

Password Level

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

2

4

2

2

2

OM 920-4 29

Menu Descriptions

Service Time

is an adjustable item that sets the amount of time the internal control timers can be temporarily sped up.

Startup

is an adjustable item that sets the time in seconds that the unit will perform its startup operation.

Recirculate

is an adjustable item that sets the time in seconds that the unit operates with only the fan, recirculating the building air upon unit start up.

Zero OA Time

is an adjustable item that sets the time in minutes that the outdoor air damper stays at a zero position upon unit start up.

Tnt Override

is an adjustable item that sets the amount of time that the unit will go into operation when the tenant override function is activated. Tenant override can be activated by the space sensor button, the network occupancy mode parameter or the keypad Occ Mode= parameter.

Post Heat

is an adjustable item that sets the duration of the post heat function available on VAV units.

Pwd Timeout

is an adjustable item that sets the amount of time in minutes that the controller will allow access to applicable menus without re-entering the necessary password.

If the keypad display remains idle for this time period, the display will revert to the “main menu” requiring a re-enter of the password.

Low DAT

is an adjustable item that sets the duration of a time period upon unit start up during which the Low Discharge

Temperature fault is ignored. This may be particularly important in colder climates when a unit has been off for a significant time period during which the unit, including the discharge air temperature sensor, has become very cold. This time period allows the unit to run long enough to turn the unit heat on and warm the discharge sensor above the alarm limit, preventing nuisance unit alarm shutdown. This time period begins when the supply fan starts.

ClgStateDelay

is an adjustable item that sets the amount of time between the fan only operating state and the mechanical cooling state. The unit will not enter the mechanical cooling state until this time has passed. This only applies on discharge control units following morning warm up heating operation.

Clg Stg Time

is an adjustable item used to set a minimum time period between compressor stage changes.

Htg Stg Time

is an adjustable item used to set a minimum time period between heating stage changes.

MinExStrtTime

is an adjustable item that sets the minimum exhaust fan on time (Default = 120 seconds).

MinExStopTime

is an adjustable item that sets the minimum exhaust fan stop time (Default = 120 seconds).

ER Whl Stg Tm

is an adjustable item used to set a minimum time period for operating at either the minimum or maximum speed before action is taken to change speed during the frost protect mode of operation.

ER Whl Off Tm

is an adjustable item used to set the minimum amount of time the energy wheel will remain off after being turned off due to a frosting/condensation condition.

Air Flw Ign

is an adjustable item that sets the amount of time the air proving switch is ignored after the supply fan is started.

Htg Wrmup Tm

is an adjustable item which is used to set the amount of time the gas burner will remain at a low fire position on 100% OSA units (default 240 seconds).

Htg Hld Period

is an adjustable item used to set the amount of time that the gas heating valve remains at its calculated value on units equipped with 100% OA (default 240 seconds). This is to allow the temperature to approach equilibrium with the modulating gas heating valve at a fixed position.

Srvc Time Inc

is an adjustable item used to set the internal stage time delay when the Service Timer is not zero, the times listed below are set to the ServiceTime (Default = 20 seconds) instead of the normal values.

• Cooling Stage Time

• Heating Stage Time

• Start Initial Time

• Recirculation

• ZeroOATime

OffHtClDelay

is an adjustable item that sets a delay in turning off the supply air fan when the unit is shut off while cooling or heating operation is active.

30 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

SAF Set-up

Table 21: Supply Fan Speed Menu

Item Display Name

SAF Ctrl=

AplyInputChgs=

CO

2

Input=

CFM Input=

BSP Input=

Rem SAF Cap=

DSP DB=

SAF Ramp Time=

Min Period=

Max Spd Chg=

DuctPress1=

Min Clg Spd=

Max Clg Spd=

Min Htg Spd=

Max Htg Spd=

Space Period=

Space Gain=

Space PAT=

Space Max Chg=

Default Setting

DSP

No

None

None

No

SPEED CONTROL

33% 0–100%

DSP CONTROL

0 .1in

60s

5s

15%

0–0 .5in

0–999s

0–999s

0–100%

0 .0–5 .0in

1 ZONE VAV CONTROL

40%

100%

40%

100%

30s

1 .5

100s

10%

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

0–999s

0 .0–100 .0s

0–999s

0–100%

Yes

None

VDC

MA

None

VDC

MA

No

Yes

Range

DSP

Spd/Net

1ZnVAV

BSP

CO2

CFM

No

Password Level

4

2

2

SAF Ctrl

is an adjustable parameter used to select how the supply fan is to be controlled. The supply fan can normally be controlled by duct pressure, space temperature (single zone

VAV or 1ZnVAV) or by a percentage of supply air fan speed from 33% to 100%. On 100% OA unit applications the fan can be controlled to maintain building static pressure, space carbon dioxide level or and airflow based on a field supply airflow station. The speed option is typically used with a building automation system. When single zone VAV control is selected, the supply fan is controlled with a PI_Loop to maintain the Control Temperature input at the Occupied

Cooling Set Point or Occupied Heating Set Point. When

BSP is selected the supply fan is controlled with a PI_Loop to maintain the building static pressure at a building static pressure Set Point.

When CO the CO

2

2

is selected the supply fan is controlled to maintain

ppm between adjustable limits by varying the supply fan speed between an adjustable range. When CFM is selected the supply fan is controlled with a PI_Loop to maintain the measured CFM at a CFM set point.

2

2

4

4

4

4

4

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

Item Display Name

Min PPM=

Max PPM=

V/A @ Min PPM=

V/A @ Max PPM=

Min SAF PPM=

Max SAF PPM=

Min PPM Spd=

Max PPM Spd=

Min CFM=

Max CFM=

V/A @Min CFM=

V/A @Max CFM=

SAF CFM DB=

SAFCFM Period=

SAF CFM Gain=

SAF CFM MxChg=

BSP DB=

BSP Period=

BSP Gain=

Max Spd Chg=

SAF Ctrl Dly=

Min Speed=

VAVBox Out=

MaxVentSpd=

Max SAF RPM=

Default Setting

SAF SETUP

30s

33%

100%

2600

Range

CO

2

CONTROL

0ppm

2000ppm

0 .0/V

10 .0/V

800

1100

0–5000ppm

0–5000ppm

0 .0–20 .0/V/mA

0 .0–20 .0/V/mA

0–5000ppm

0–5000ppm

50

100

0–100%

0–100%

CFM CONTROL

0CFM

10000CFM

0 .0/V

10 .0/V

3%

0–60000CFM

0–60000CFM

0 .0–20 .0/V/mA

0 .0–20 .0/V/mA

0–100%

30s

0 .1

5%

0–999s

0 .0–100 .0

0–100%

BSP CONTROL

0 .01in

5s

0 .2

4%

0 .0–0 .1in

0–999s

0 .0–100 .0s

0–100%

0–999s

0–100%

Heat

Cool

0–100%

0–5000

Password Level

4

4

4

2

2

2

2

4

4

4

4

4

2

2

2

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

2

2

AplyInputChgs

is the Apply Input Changes flag must be changed from no to yes in order for the controller to recognize the changes. Setting the Apply Input Changes flag to YES will automatically reset the controller.

CO

2

Input

is an adjustable item used to select the type of input for a field installed CO controller ignores any CO

2

2

sensor. If this is set to None the

sensor input. If CO

2

control and/ or monitoring is desired this parameter is set to VDC or mA to match the input type of the field supplied CO

2

sensor input.

This parameter applies only to 100% OA unit configurations.

CFM Input

is an adjustable item used to select the type of input for a field installed airflow station. If this is set to None the controller ignores any field airflow station input. If CFM control and/or monitoring is desired this parameter is set to VDC or mA to match the input type of the field supplied airflow input. This parameter applies only to 100% OA unit configurations.

OM 920-4 31

Menu Descriptions

BSP Input

is an adjustable item used to select whether on not a building static pressure sensor is connected to the unit controller. If this is set to No the controller ignores any building static pressure input. If BSP control of the supply fan is desired this parameter must be set to Yes. This parameter applies only to 100% OA unit configurations.

Remote SF Cap

is an adjustable item for setting the supply fan speed by the keypad or by a network control signal.

DSP DB

is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around the DuctSP Spt= parameter. No duct static pressure control action is taken when the current duct static pressure input is within this dead band.

SAF Ramp Time

is an adjustable item that sets the amount of time it will take for the variable speed fan to drive from its minimum to maximum speed as well as its maximum to minimum speed. The SAF Ramp Time= value on the keypad must be changed whenever the ramp time of the variable speed fan is changed. The ramp up time must equal the ramp down time, and both must equal the SAF RampTime value to provide stable operation.

Min Period

is an adjustable item that sets the duration of the sample time between speed changes. The sample time must be long enough to allow the static pressure to get very close to its steady state value before another calculation is made.

Max Spd Chg

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum value for a speed increase or decrease. This speed change

(either a positive or negative value) is added to the current fan speed whenever the duct static pressure is outside of the deadband, and the Min Period time has passed since the previous speed change.

DuctPress1

is a status only item that indicates the current value for the duct status pressure sensor.

Min Clg Spd

is an adjustable item that sets the minimum supply fan speed used for cooling operation when 1ZnVAV is selected as the method of supply fan control.

Max Clg Spd

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum supply fan speed used for cooling operation when 1ZnVAV is selected as the method of supply fan control.

Min Htg Spd

is an adjustable item that sets the minimum supply fan speed used for heating operation when 1ZnVAV is selected as the method of supply fan control.

Max Htg Spd

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum supply fan speed used for heating operation when 1ZnVAV is selected as the method of supply fan control.

Space Period

is an adjustable item that sets the “sampling time” used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when 1ZnVAV supply fan control is selected.

Space Gain

is an adjustable item that sets the “gain” used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when

1ZnVAV supply fan control is selected.

Space PAT

is an adjustable item that sets the “project ahead time” used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when 1ZnVAV supply fan control is selected.

Space Max Chg

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum value of increase or decrease of the supply fan speed each period used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when 1ZnVAV supply fan control is selected.

Min PPM

is an adjustable item that sets the minimum PPM value of the field supplied CO

2

input signal.

Max PPM

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum PPM value of the field supplied CO

2

input signal.

V/mA @ Min PPM

is an adjustable item that sets the DC voltage or mA value at the minimum PPM value of the field supplied CO

2

input signal.

V/mA @ Max PPM

is an adjustable item that sets the DC voltage or mA value at the maximum PPM value of the field supplied CO

2

input signal.

Min SAF PPM

is an adjustable item that sets the PPM value at which the supply fan speed is controlled to minimum when

CO

2

supply fan control is selected.

Max SAF PPM

is an adjustable item that sets the PPM value at which the supply fan speed is controlled to maximum when

CO

2

supply fan control is selected.

Min PPM Spd

is an adjustable item that sets the supply fan speed when the CO

2

input signal is at minimum when CO2 supply fan control is selected.

Max PPM

Spd is an adjustable item that sets the supply fan speed when the CO

2

input signal is at maximum when CO2 supply fan control is selected.

32 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Min CFM

is an adjustable item that sets the minimum CFM value of the field supplied airflow station input signal.

Max CFM

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum CFM value of the field supplied airflow station input signal.

V/mA @ Min CFM

is an adjustable item that sets the DC voltage or mA value at the minimum CFM value of the field supplied airflow station input signal.

V/mA @ Max CFM

is an adjustable item that sets the DC voltage or mA value at the maximum CFM value of the field supplied airflow station input signal.

SAF CFM DB

is an adjustable item that sets the “deadband” used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when airflow (CFM) supply fan control is selected.

SAF CFM

Period is an adjustable item that sets the “sample time” used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when airflow (CFM) supply fan control is selected.

Space Gain

is an adjustable item that sets the “gain” used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when airflow (CFM) supply fan control is selected.

Space Max Chg

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum value of increase or decrease of the supply fan speed each period used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when airflow (CFM) supply fan control is selected.

BSP DB

is an adjustable item that sets the “deadband” used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when building static pressure (BSP) supply fan control is selected.

BSP Period

is an adjustable item that sets the “sample time” used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when building static pressure (BSP) supply fan control is selected.

BSP Gain

is an adjustable item that sets the “gain” used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when building static pressure (BSP) supply fan control is selected.

Max Spd Chg

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum value of increase or decrease of the supply fan speed each period used in the PI control function to vary the supply fan speed when building static pressure (BSP) supply fan control is selected.

DSP Ctrl Dly

is an adjustable item that sets the duration of time that the minimum speed signal is sent to the variable speed supply air fan after the supply fan is started via a digital output. Control reverts to either duct pressure or speed after the fan has been on for the DSPCtrlDelay (default 30 seconds).

Min Speed

is an adjustable item which is used to set the minimum supply fan speed (default 33%).

VAVBox Out

is a status only item that indicates the current value of the VAV output. The VAV output is only available to the field via network communications.

Max Vent Speed

is an adjustable item that sets the supply fan speed when an external ventilation override input to the supply fan is present.

Max SAF RPM

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum

RPM value for the supply air fan. Note this is set based on the supply fan model size and the system specifications.

OM 920-4 33

Menu Descriptions

RF/EF Set-Up

Table 22: Return Fan/Exhaust Fan Set-up Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting

RF/EF Ctrl=

Rem ExhF Cap=

BSP DB=

BSP Period=

BSP Gain=

Max Spd Chg=

RFEF Ctrl Dly=

Min Speed=

MinExStrtTime=

MinExStopTime=

MinExhOAPos=

MinExhSAFCap=

Exh On OA Pos

Exh Mx OA Pos

MaxVentSpd=

Max RFEF RPM=

BuildingP

5%

0 .01in

5s

0 .2

4%

30s

5%

120s

120s

5%

10%

40%

100%

100%

2600

ECM Status

DPA/MPS units only

* Not applicable on DPS Units

0–100%

0–999s

0–100%

60–300s

60–300s

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

0–5000

OK

HalSnsr

ElctHiT

Range

None

Tracking*

BldgP

Spd/Net

OAD

0–100%

0 .0–0 .1in

0–999s

0 .0–100 .0s

MtrHiT

PModHiT

MtrLckd

PhzFail

LoDcVlt

HiDcVlt

LoMainV

HiMainV

NoComm

Password Level

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

2

4

4

6

4

4

4

2

34 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

RF/EF Ctrl

is an adjustable parameter used to select how the return/exhaust fans are to be controlled. The exhaust fans can be controlled by the building pressure or by a percentage of return/exhaust air fan speed from 5% to 100%. The speed option is typically used with a building automation system.

Remote RAF Cap

is an adjustable item for setting the return fan speed by the keypad or by a network control signal.

Remote ExhF Cap

is an adjustable item for setting the exhaust fan speed by the keypad or by a network control signal.

BSP DB

is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around the BldgSP Spt parameter. No building static pressure control action is taken when the current building static pressure input is within this dead band.

BSP Period

is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling period” used in the PI control function that modulates the return air or exhaust fan speed.

BSP Gain

is an adjustable item which sets the “gain” used in the PI control function that modulates the return air or exhaust fan speed.

Max Spd Chg

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum value for a exhaust speed increase or decrease. This speed change (either a positive or negative value) is added to the current fan speed whenever the building static pressure is outside of the deadband, and the BSP Period= time has passed since the previous speed change.

RFEF Ctrl Delay

is an adjustable item that sets the duration of time that the minimum speed signal is sent to the variable speed supply air fan after the return fan is started via a digital output. Control reverts to either building pressure or speed after the fan has been on for the BSPCtrlDelay (default 30 seconds).

Min Speed

is an adjustable item the sets the minimum speed of the RF/EF fan.

MinExStrtTime

is an adjustable item that sets the Minimum

Exhaust Fan On Time (Default = 120 seconds). Once started, the exhaust fan must run for a minimum of this time before it is turned back off.

MinExStopTime

is an adjustable item that sets the Minimum

Exhaust Fan Stop Time (Default = 120 seconds). Once stopped, the exhaust fan must remain off for a minimum of this time before it can be re-started.

MinExhOAPos

is an adjustable item that sets the Minimum

Exhaust OA Position (default 5%). The outdoor air dampers must be open more that this value for prop exhaust fan operation.

MinExhSAFCap

is an adjustable item that sets the Minimum

Exhaust SAF capacity (default 10%). The supply air fan speed must be higher than this value for prop exhaust fan operation.

Exh On OA Pos

is an adjustable item that turns on the exhaust fan when the OA damper position reaches this setting.

Exh Mx OA Pos

is an adjustable item that sets the OA damper position at which the exhaust fan will be at is maximum speed.

MaxVentSpd

is an adjustable item that sets the exhaust fan speed when an external ventilation override input to the exhaust fan is present.

Max RFEF RPM

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum

RPM value for the exhaust air fan.

NOTE:

This is set based on the exhaust fan model size .

ECM Status

is a status only item that indicates the current status of the return/exhaust fan motor

OM 920-4 35

Menu Descriptions

Heat/Cool Changeover Set-Up

Table 23: Heat/Cool Changeover Setup Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting

Ctrl Temp Src= RAT

Use Tstat Spt=

Occ Clg DB=

Clg Period=

Clg Gain=

Clg PAT=

Max Clg Chg=

Occ Htg DB=

Htg Period=

Htg Gain=

Htg PAT=

Max Htg Chg=

AplyTstatChg=

No

2 .0°F

60s

0 .1

600s

5 .0°F

2 .0°F

60s

0 .1

600s

5 .0°F

No

Ctrl Temp Src

is an adjustable item which selects the temperature sensor input to be used for the unit heating/ cooling changeover or occupied cooling and heating capacity change decisions. For example, if the CtrlTemp Src parameter is set to “Return,” then the Control Temp parameter reads the same value as the Return Air parameter.

Use Tstat Spt

is an adjustable item used to set whether or not to use the Tstat set point adjustment value for the Occ Clg Spt and Occ Htg Spt.

Occ Clg DB

is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around the Occ Cooling Set Point parameter. For example, if the Occ Cooling Set Point parameter is set to 75ºF and the Clg

Deadband parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band around the set point would be from 76.0ºF to 74.0ºF.

Clg Period

is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time” used in the PI control function to vary the DAT Clg Spt in zone control applications.

Clg Gain

is an adjustable item which sets the “gain” used in the PI control function to vary the DAT Clg Spt in zone control applications.

Clg PAT

is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead time” used in the PI control function to vary the DAT Clg Spt in zone control applications.

Max Clg Change

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum value for an increase or decrease of the DAT Clg Spt in zone control applications.

Range

RAT

Space

MAT

OAT

None

No, Yes

0 .0–10 .0°F

0–999s

0 .0–100 .0

0–999s

0 .0–50 .0°F

0 .0–10 .0°F

0–999s

0 .0–100 .0

0–999s

0 .0–50 .0°F

No, Yes

Password Level

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

Occ Htg DB

is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around the Occ Heating Set Point parameter. For example, if the Occ Heating Set Point parameter is set to 70ºF and the Htg

Deadband parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band around the set point would be from 69.0ºF to 71.0ºF.

Htg Period

is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time” used in the PI control function to vary the DAT Htg Spt in zone control applications.

Htg Gain

is an adjustable item which sets the “gain” used in the PI control function to vary the DAT Htg Spt in zone control applications.

Htg PAT

is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead time” used in the PI control function to vary the DAT Htg Spt in zone control applications.

Max Htg Chg

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum value for an increase or decrease of the DAT Htg Spt in zone control applications.

AplyTstatChg

is an adjustable item that resets the controller.

This is required to affect changes to the Use TstatSpt parameter.

36 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Cooling Set-Up

Table 24: Cooling Set-up Menu

Item Display Name

Clg Stage Time=

Clg DB=

Clg Lo OAT Lk=

OAT Diff=

Clg Reset=

Min Clg Spt=

Min Clg Spt @=

Max Clg Spt=

Max Clg Spt @=

Default Setting

5min

2 .0°F

55°F

2°F

None

65 .0°F

0/NA

65 .0°F

100/NA

Unocc Diff= 3°F

Clg Stage Time

is an adjustable item used to set a minimum time period between compressor stage changes.

Clg DB

is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around the discharge cooling set point parameter. For example, if the discharge cooling set point parameter is set to 55ºF and the

Clg Db parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band around the set point would be from 56.0ºF to 54.0ºF.

Clg Lo OAT Lk

is an adjustable item which sets the low outdoor air temperature mechanical cooling lockout point.

Mechanical cooling operation is disabled when the outdoor air temperature sensor input falls below this set point.

OATDiff

is an adjustable item which sets a differential above the OAT Clg Lock parameter. Mechanical cooling operation is re-enabled when the outdoor air temperature sensor input rises above the OAT Clg Lock value by more than this differential.

Range

5–60min

1 .0–10 .0°F

0–100°F

0–10°F

None

Ntwrk

Space

Return

OAT

ExtmA

ExtV

Airflow

40 .0–100 .0°F

0–100/

NA

°F

°C mA

%

40 .0–100 .0°F

0–100/

NA

°F

°C mA

%

0–10°F

Password Level

4

4

4

4

6

6

6

6

6

2

Clg Reset

is an adjustable item that is used to set the type of cooling reset to be used.

Min Clg Spt

is an adjustable item which sets the minimum cooling discharge set point for use with a cooling discharge air temperature set point reset schedule.

Min Clg Spt @

is an adjustable item which sets the value of the sensor input, selected with the Cooling Reset parameter, at which the DAT cooling set point parameter is reset to the minimum DAT cooling set point value.

Max Clg Spt

is an adjustable item which sets the maximum cooling discharge set point for use with a cooling discharge air temperature set point reset schedule.

Max Clg Spt @

is an adjustable item which sets the value of the sensor input, selected with the Cooling Reset parameter, at which the DAT cooling set point parameter is reset to the maximum DAT cooling set point value.

OM 920-4 37

Menu Descriptions

Figure 10

graphically shows the cooling reset operation. The normal DAT cooling set point is 55.0 F. The cooling reset scheme is set to airflow. The unit is to adjust the DAT from

55.0 F to 65.0 F. When the unit is at 35% of the design airflow the discharge temperature is to be 65.0 F. When the unit is at

80% of its airflow the DAT is to be 55.0F. This example would give the following inputs:

• Min Clg Spt= 55.0 F

• Min Clg Spt @= 80%

• Max Clg Spt= 65.0 F

• Max Clg Spt @= 35%

Based on the above, the unit will have a discharge air temperature set point of 55.0 F from 80% to 100% of the airflow.

Unocc Diff

is an adjustable item that sets the unoccupied cooling differential.

Figure 10: Cooling Setpoint

Econo Set-up

Table 25: Economizer Setup Menu

Item Display Name

Clg Stage Time

Chgover Temp=

Clg DB=

Econo Period=

Econo Gain=

Econo PAT=

Econo Max Chg=

Flush Econo=

Econo Diff=

EWT Diff=

Default Setting

5min

65 .0°F

2 .0d°F

30/40s

(air/water)

10/1

(air/water)

60/40s

(air/water)

10/15%

(air/water)

Yes

2°F

3 .0d°F

Clg Reset=

Min Clg Spt=

Min Clg Spt @

Max Clg Spt=

Max Clg Spt @

MWU Sensor=

None

65 .0°F

0/ NA

65 .0°F

100/ NA

RAT

Range

5–60min

0 .0–100 .0°F

1 .0–10 .0d°F

0–999s

0 .0–100 .0

0–999s

0–100%

No

Yes

0–10°F

0 .0–10 .0d°F

None

Ntwrk

Space

Return

OAT

ExtmA

ExtV

Airflow

40 .0–100 .0°F

0–100/

NA

°F

°C mA

%

40 .0–100 .0°F

0–100/

NA

°F

°C mA

%

NonRAT

Space

6

6

6

6

6

4

Password Level

4

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

38 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Clg Stage Time

is an adjustable item used to set a minimum time period between compressor stage changes.

Chgover Temp

is an adjustable item which sets the OA dry bulb temperature at which the units changes over to the economizer operation.

Clg DB

is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around the discharge cooling setpoint parameter. For example, if the discharge cooling setpoint parameter is set to 55ºF and the

Clg DB parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band around the set point would be from 56.0ºF to 54.0ºF.

Econo Period

is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time” used in the PI control function of the economizer actuator.

Econo Gain

is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in the PI control function of the economizer actuator.

Econo PAT

is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead time” used in the PI control function of the economizer actuator.

Econo Max Chg

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum value for an increase or decrease of the economizer actuator.

Flush Econo

is an adjustable item used to enable the waterside economizer flush mode sequence.

Econo Diff

is an adjustable item which sets a differential above the EconChgovrT parameter. Economizer operation is disabled when the OA Temp parameter indicates a value above the EconChgovrT= parameter by more than this differential.

EWT Diff

is an adjustable item that sets a differential below the MAT at which waterside economizer operation is enabled based on entering water temperature.

Min Clg Spt

is an adjustable item which sets the minimum cooling discharge set point for use with a cooling discharge air temperature set point reset schedule.

Min Clg Spt @

is an adjustable item which sets the value of the sensor input, selected with the Cooling Reset parameter, at which the DAT cooling setpoint parameter is reset to the minimum DAT cooling setpoint value.

Max Clg Spt

is an adjustable item which sets the maximum cooling discharge set point for use with a cooling discharge air temperature set point reset schedule.

Max Clg Spt @

is an adjustable item which sets the value of the sensor input, selected with the Cooling Reset parameter, at which the DAT cooling setpoint parameter is reset to the maximum DAT cooling setpoint value.

MWU Sensor

is an adjustable item that sets the temperature sensor input to be used for morning warmup heating operation on discharge air control units. Setting this parameter to none disables morning warm up operation.

OM 920-4 39

Menu Descriptions

Min OA Set-Up Menu

Table 26: Min OA Damper Menu

Item Display Name

Apply Changes

Min OA Reset=

BSP OA Ovrd

Rst Lmt Snsr

OA @ MinV/mA=

OA @ MaxV/mA=

Min V/mA=

Max V/mA=

PPM @DCV Lmt=

PPM @Vnt Lmt=

IAQ PPM=

Min PPM=

Max PPM=

V/A @Min PPM=

V/A @Max PPM=

V mA

Min CFM

Max CFM

V/A @ Min CFM

V/A @ Max CFM

Min Fan Diff=

Max Fan Diff=

Min Clg Spd=

Des Clg Spd

DesignFlow=

Field AO Stn

OA Flow=

Min OA Flw Spt=

Des Flo DB=

DF Period=

Des Flo Gain=

DF Max Chg=

OA CFM DB

OA CFMPerod

OA CFM Gain

OA CFM Max Chg

LH Lvl Pos=

RH Lvl Pos=

MinRFEFTm=

BSPOvdST=

BSPOvdGain=

BSPOvdMxChg=

ResetTLmt=

RstTSmplT=

RstTGain=

RstTPAT=

40

Default Setting

No

None

No

None

4

0CFM

10000CFM

0 .0/

V

10 .0/

V

20%

50%

40%

100%

Yes

None

-

2000CFM

3%

30s

0 .1

5%

3%

30s

0 .1

5%

-

-

120sec

5sec

0 .2

4%

32 .0°F

5sec

0 .2

60sec

0%

100%

0 .0/

V

10 .0/

V

800ppm

1000ppm

-

0ppm

2000ppm

0 .0/

V

10 .0/

V

Range

No, Yes

None

Network

Ext VDC

Ext mA

IAQ VDC

IAQ mA

No/Yes

None

DAT

EFT

MAT

0–100%

0–100%

0 .0–20 .0/

V mA

0 .0–20 .0/

V mA

0–5000ppm

0-5000ppm

0–5000ppm

0–5000ppm

0–5000ppm

0 .0–20 .0/

V mA

0 .0–20 .0/

0–60000CFM

0–60000CFM

0 .0–20 .0/

V mA

0 .0–20 .0/

V mA

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

Yes, No

None

VDC mA

0–60000CFM

0–60000CFM

0–100%

0–999s

0 .0–100 .0

0–100%

0–100%

0–999s

0 .0–100 .0

0–100%

0 .00–100 .00%

0 .00–100 .00%

0–3600sec

0–999sec

0–999

0–100%

0–100°F

0–999sec

0–999

0-999sec

Password Level

4

4

2

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

2

2

2

4

2

2

2

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Table 26 continued: Min OA Damper Menu

Item Display Name

RstTMaxChg=

Min Inc Rate=

Max Inc Rate=

0-30% OA Max=

Default Setting

4%

0 .03

1 .0

30%

Apply Changes

- the Apply Changes flag must be changed from no to yes in order for the controller to recognize the changes. Setting the Apply Changes flag to YES will automatically reset the controller.

Min OA Reset

is an adjustable item that sets the type of minimum OA damper position reset to be used. When this is set to “None” the Min OA Pos= parameter is set to the

Ventilation Limit. When this is set to “Network,” “Ext VDC,”

“Ext mA,” “IAQ VDC,” or “IAQ mA” then the Min OA Pos= parameter varies from the Ventilation Limit down to the

Demand Control Ventilation Limit as the reset signal goes from its maximum to minimum value.

NOTE:

When the Min OA Reset type is set to Network and the Apply changes flag is set to yes, the value of the

Vent Limit is automatically set to 100%, the value of the DCV limit is set to 0% and the LoFlo V Lmt is set to 0% .

BSP OA Ovrd

is an adjustable item used to enable/disable the building static pressure override feature.

Rst Lmt Snsr

is an adjustable item used to set the sensor to be used in conjunction with the OA reset limit function.

OA @ MinV/mA

is an adjustable item used when Min OA

Reset= is set to “Ext VDC” or “Ext mA” to define the Min

OA Pos= is when the field signal is at minimum value.

NOTE:

Min OA Pos= is limited above the Demand Control

Ventilation Limit .

OA @ MaxV/mA

is an adjustable item used when Min OA

Reset= is set to “Ext VDC” or “Ext mA” to define the Min

OA Pos= when the field signal is at the minimum value.

NOTE:

Min OA Pos= is limited below the ventilation limit .

Min V/mA

is an adjustable item used to set the minimum value of the field input signal.

Max V/mA

is an adjustable item used to set the maximum value of the field input signal.

PPM @ DCV Limit

is an adjustable item used when Min OA

Reset= is set to “IAQ VDC” or “IAQ mA” to define at what

PPM value the Min OA Pos= is to be at the Demand Control

Ventilation Limit value.

PPM @ Vent Limit

is an adjustable item used when Min OA

Reset= is set to “IAQ VDC” or “IAQ mA” to define at what

PPM value the Min OA Pos= is to be at the Ventilation Limit value.

IAQ PPM

is a status only item which indicates the current reading from the CO2 sensor.

Range

0–100%

0 .0–100 .0

0 .0–100 .0

0–100%

Password Level

2

2

2

2

Min PPM

is an adjustable item that sets the minimum PPM value.

Max PPM

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum PPM value.

V/mA @ Min PPM

is an adjustable item that sets the minimum

PPM value at the minimum DC voltage or mA value of the

CO2 sensor used when Min OA Reset= is set to “IAQ VDC” or “IAQ mA.”

V/mA @ Max PPM

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum PPM value at the maximum DC voltage or mA value of the CO2 sensor used when Min OA Reset= is set to

“IAQ VDC” or “IAQ mA.”

Min CFM

is an adjustable item that sets the minimum CFM value of the field supplied flow station.

Max CFM

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum CFM value of the field supplied flow station.

V/A @ Min CFM

is an adjustable item that sets the sensor input value at minimum CFM reading.

V/A @ Max CFM

is an adjustable item that sets the sensor input value at maximum CFM reading.

Min Fan Diff

is an adjustable item which sets a differential between the discharge and return fan capacities above which the minimum allowable Min OA Pos= begins to be reset upwards from the Demand Control Ventilation Limit toward the Ventilation Limit.

Max Fan Diff

is an adjustable item which sets a differential between the discharge and return fan capacities at which the minimum allowable Min OA Pos= is fully reset up to the

Ventilation Limit.

Min Clg Spd

is an adjustable item that sets the discharge fan speed on a VAV unit at which the Ventilation Limit reaches the LoFloVent= value.

Des Clg Spd

is an adjustable item used to adjust the design cooling speed setpoint.

Design Flow

is an adjustable item used to turn the optional

DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring reset function on and off. This is one of several available methods of automatically resetting the Min OA Pos parameter.

Field OA Stn

is an adjustable item used to turn the optional field supplied outdoor airflow measuring station function on and off.

OM 920-4 41

Menu Descriptions

OA Flow

is a status only item which indicates the current outdoor airflow based on an optional OA airflow sensor input used when the unit is equipped the DesignFlow OA control feature, or a field supplied OA measuring station.

Min OAFlw Spt

is an adjustable item that is used to set the minimum design flow CFM’s when the unit is equipped with the optional DesignFlow OA control feature, or a field supplied OA measuring station.

OA CFM DB

is an adjustable item which sets the “deadband” used in the control function that modulates Min OA Pos parameter to maintain the OA Flow parameter at the MinOA

Flow set point when a unit is equipped with the optional

DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring feature, or a field supplied OA measuring station.

OA CFMPeriod

is an adjustable item which sets the

“sampling time” used in the PI control function that modulates the Min OA Pos parameter to maintain the OA

Flow parameter at the MinOA Flow set point when a unit is equipped with the optional DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring feature, or a field supplied OA measuring station.

OA CFM Gain

is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in the PI control function that modulates the Min OA

Pos parameter to maintain the OA Flow parameter at the

MinOA Flow set point when a unit is equipped with the optional DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring feature, or a field supplied OA measuring station.

OA CFM Max Chg

is an adjustable item which sets the “maximum step” used in the control function that modulates the Min OA Pos parameter to maintain the OA

Flow parameter at the MinOA Flow set point when a unit is equipped with the optional DesignFlow outdoor airflow measuring feature, or a field supplied OA measuring station.

LH Lvl Pos

is a status item which is used to calibrate the left-hand side (unit opposite drive side) of the optional

DesignFlow outdoor measuring apparatus. For details regarding calibration of the DesignFlow apparatus, refer to the applicable model-specific installation and maintenance manual.

RH Lvl Pos

is a status item which is used to calibrate the right-hand side (unit drive side) of the optional DesignFlow outdoor measuring apparatus. For details regarding calibration of the DesignFlow apparatus, refer to the applicable model-specific installation and maintenance manual.

MinRFEFTm

is an adjustable item used to set the time period for which the return/exhaust fan must operate at the minimum speed before the building static pressure override function is activated.

BSPOvdST

an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time” used in the PI control function used for the building static pressure override feature.

BSPOvdGain

is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in the PI control function used for the building static pressure override feature.

BSPOvdMxChg

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum value for an increase or decrease of the outside air damper position due to the building static pressure override feature.

ResetTLmt

is an adjustable item which sets a temperature low limit which overrides functions that reset the outside air damper position if the temperature gets too cold.

RstTSmplT

an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time” used in the PI control function used for the Reset

Temperature Limit feature.

RstTGain

is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in the PI control function used for the Reset Temperature Limit feature.

RstTPAT

is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead time” used in the PI control function used for the Reset

Temperature Limit feature.

RstTMaxChg

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum change value PI loop used for the Reset Temperature Limit feature.

Min Inc Rate

is an adjustable item used to set the minimum increase rate for the outside air damper “cold start” sequence.

Max Inc Rate

is an adjustable item used to set the maximum increase rate for the outside air damper “cold start” sequence.

0-30% OA Max

is an adjustable item used to set the maximum outside air damper position when the unit is configured for a

30% damper.

42 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Heating Set-Up Menu

The Heating menu provides a summary of the control parameters for units with heating. The unit’s heating mode of operation is controlled by the control temperature and the heating setpoint temperature. The unit goes into the heating mode of operation by analyzing the control temperature.

Table 27: Heating Set-Up Menu

Item Display Name

Htg Stage Time

Htg DB

Htg Period=

Htg Gain=

Htg PAT=

Htg Max Chg

Htg Hi OAT Lock

OAT Diff

Default Setting

5min

2 .0°F

60s

0 .1

600s

10%

55°F

2°F

Htg Reset=

Min Htg Spt=

Min Htg Spt @

Max Htg Spt=

Max Htg Spt @

Min DAT Ctrl=

Min Dat Limit

F&BP Method=

F&BP ChgOvrT=

Occ Heating=

Unocc Diff=

Htg Warmup Tm=

Htg Hld Period=

Max Purge Hld=

Gas Derate V=

MWU Sensor

None

55 .0°F

0/

NA

55 .0°F

100 .0°F

Yes

55 .0°F

OpenVlv

37°F

Yes

3°F

240s

240s

20s

10 .0V

RAT

The control temperature can be return temperature, space temperature or outside air temperature. The unit goes into the heating mode of operation when the control temperature is below the heating setpoint by more than ½ the deadband.

Range

0–100/

NA

°F

°C mA

40 .0–140 .0°F

0–100/

NA

°F

°C mA

Yes, No

0 .0–70 .0°F

OpenVlv

ModVlv

0–60°F

Yes, No

2–60min

1 .0–10 .0°F

0–999s

0 .0–100 .0

0–999s

0–100%

0–100°F

0–10°F

None

Ntwrk

Space

Return

OAT

ExtmA

ExtV

40 .0–140 .0°F

0–10°F

0–999s

0–999s

10–180s

0–10 .0V

RAT

Space

None

Password Level

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

6

6

6

6

4

2

2

2

4

6

2

2

6

4

2

OM 920-4 43

Menu Descriptions

Htg Stage Time

is an adjustable item used to set a minimum time period between heating stage changes.

Htg DB

is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around the discharge heating setpoint parameter. For example, if the discharge heating setpoint parameter is set to 100ºF and the

Htg DB= parameter is set to 2ºF, the dead band around the set point would be from 101.0ºF to 99.0ºF.

Htg Period

an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time” used in the PI control function that modulates the heating valve or face & bypass dampers.

Htg Gain

is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in the PI control function that modulates the heating valve or face & bypass dampers.

Htg PAT

is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead time” used in the PI control function that modulates the heating valve or face & bypass dampers.

Htg Max Chg

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum value for an increase or decrease of the heating valve or face

& bypass damper position.

Htg Hi OAT Lock

is an adjustable item which sets the high outdoor air temperature heating lockout point. Heating operation is disabled when the outdoor air temperature sensor input rises above this set point.

OAT Diff

is an adjustable item which sets a differential below the OATHtg Lock parameter. Heating operation is re-enabled when the outdoor air temperature sensor input falls below the

OATHtg Lock value by more than this differential.

Htg Reset

is an adjustable item used to set the type of heating reset to be used.

Min Htg Spt

is an adjustable item which sets the minimum heating discharge set point for use with a heating discharge air temperature set point reset schedule.

Min Htg Spt @

is an adjustable item which sets the value of the sensor input, selected with the heating reset parameter, at which the heating setpoint is reset to the Min Htg Spt value.

Max Htg Spt

is an adjustable item which sets the maximum heating discharge set point for use with a heating discharge air temperature set point reset schedule.

Max Htg Spt @

is an adjustable item which sets the value of the sensor input, selected with the heating reset parameter, at which the heating setpoint is reset to the Max Htg Spt value.

Min DAT Ctrl

is an adjustable item used on VAV or CAV discharge control units to activate or deactivate the low discharge temperature limit function available on units equipped with modulating or multistage heat.

Min DAT Limit

is a status only item which indicates the discharge air low limit temperature on CAV zone control units. Heating will be activated to maintain this setting when the discharge temperature falls below it during the Fan Only operating state. On VAV or CAV discharge control units, the minimum discharge temperature limit is the DAT Clg Spt.

F&BP Method

is an adjustable item used to set the face and bypass control method. When a unit equipped with steam or hot water and face and bypass damper, there are two methods available for controlling the heating arrangement. These are the “Open Valve” and “Modulating Valve” methods.

F&BP ChgOvrT

is an adjustable item used to set the face and bypass changeover temperature.

Htg Warmup Tm

is an adjustable item which is used to set the amount of time the gas burner will remain at a low fire position on 100% OSA units (default 240 seconds) during the special cold start sequence.

Htg Hld Period

is an adjustable item used to set the amount of time that the gas heating valve remains at its calculated value on units equipped with 100% OA (default 240 seconds) during the special cold start sequence. This is to allow the temperature to approach equilibrium with the modulating gas heating valve at a fixed position.

Occ Heating

is an adjustable item which enables and disables the “daytime” heating mode of operation. If the Occ Heating parameter is set to No, the unit will only go into heating during the initial morning warm-up cycle. If the Occ Heating parameter is set to Yes, the unit can go into the heating mode of operation any time during the day.

Unocc Diff

is an adjustable item that sets the unoccupied heating differential.

Max Purge Hld

is an adjustable item that sets the value of the maximum purge hold timer.

Gas Derate V

is an adjustable item used to set the maximum analog output value for controlling the modulating gas valve actuator.

MWU Sensor

is an adjustable item that sets the temperature sensor input to be used for morning warmup heating operation on discharge air control units. Setting this parameter to none disables morning warm up operation.

44 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Dehum Set-Up

Table 28:

Dehumidification Menu

Item Display Name

Dehum Method=

RH DB=

Dewpoint DB=

RH Period=

RH Gain=

RH PAT=

RH Max Chg=

LSC Lo Gain=

RH Stg Time=

Stg Rht DB=

Dehum Ctrl=

Default Setting

None

2%

2 .0°F

30s

1

30s

10%

0 .2

10min

5°F

Occupied

Sensor Loc=

Mn Lvg Coil T=

Mx Lvg Coil T=

Min Rheat Spt=

Max Rheat Spt =

RH Sens Type=

RH Min Sig=

RH Max Sig=

Min Dehum Spd=

Max Dehum Spd=

Rht Min Pos=

RH Dec Rate=

Return

45 .0°F

52 .0°F

55 .0°F

65 .0°F

VDC

0 .0V

10 .0V

33%

100%

10% (RPS)

15% (MPS, DPS, DPH)

1

Dehum Method

is an adjustable item used to set the dehumidification method to either “RH” or “DewPt.” When this parameter is set to “RH,” dehumidification operation is controlled to maintain the Rel Humidity value at the Relative

Humidity Set Point. When this parameter is set to “DewPt,” dehumidification operation is controlled to maintain the Dew

Point= value at the Dew Point Set Point. When this parameter is set to “Always” dehumidification will be active as long as mechanical cooling is not disabled.

RH DB

is an adjustable item that sets a dead band around the relative humidity set point. For example, if the RH Setpoint parameter is set to 50% and the RH Db parameter is set to

2% the dead band around the set point would be from 49% to

51%.

Dewpoint DB

is an adjustable item that sets a dead band around the dew point set point. For example, if the DewPoint

Spt parameter is set to 50ºF and the DewPntDb parameter is set to 2ºF the dead band around the set point would be from

49ºF to 51ºF.

Range

None

Rel Hum

DewPt

Always

0-10%

2-10°F

0-999s

0 .0-100 .0

0-999s

0-100%

0 .0-100 .0

0-60min

0-20°F

Occupied

Always

Return

OAT

Space

40-100°F

40-100°F

40 .0-100 .0°F

40 .0-100 .0°F

VDC mA

0 .0-20 .0

V/mA

0 .0-20 .0

V/mA

0-100%

0-100%

0-100%

0-10 .00%/s

Password Level

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

2

4

RH Period

is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time” used in the PI control function for controlling the reheat valve.

RH Gain

is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in the PI control function for controlling the reheat valve.

RH PAT

is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead time” used in the PI control function for controlling the reheat valve.

RH Max Chg

an adjustable item that sets the maximum value for an increase or decrease for controlling the reheat valve.

LSC Lo Gain

- is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in the PI control function for controlling the liquid subcooling reheat valve.

RH Stg Time

is an adjustable item is an adjustable item which sets a stage time period for controlling reheat on units eqquipped with a single stage of hot gas reheat.

OM 920-4 45

Menu Descriptions

Stg Rht DB

is an adjustable item which sets a dead band around the reheat setpoint parameter.

Dehum Ctrl

is an adjustable item used to select whether dehumidification as “always” allowed or only during

“occupied” modes of operation.

Sensor Loc

is an adjustable item which is used to select the location of the humidity sensor. The location is selected by setting the Sensor Location value on the keypad to Return,

Space, or OAT. The significance of the sensor location is that this determines which temperature sensor is use to calculate the Dewpoint. OAT can only be selected for units with DAT control.

Mn Lvg Coil T

is an adjustable item which is used to set the minimum leaving coil temperature (Default = 45°F).

Mx Lvg Coil T

is an adjustable item which is used to set the maximum leaving coil temperature (Default = 52°F).

Min Reheat Spt

is an adjustable item which is used to set the minimum DAT during dehumidification.

Max Reheat Spt

is an adjustable item which is used to set the maximum DAT during dehumidification.

RH Sen Type

is an adjustable item used to define the field supplied humidity sensor input signal type.

RH Min Signal

is an adjustable item used to define the minimum value of the field supplied humidity sensor current or voltage signal.

RH Max Signal

is an adjustable item used to define the maximum value of the field supplied humidity sensor current or voltage signal.

Min Dehum Spd

is an adjustable item used to set the minimum supply fan VFD speed during dehumidification.

Max Dehum Spd

is an adjustable item used to set the maximum supply fan VFD speed during dehumidification.

Rht Min Pos

is an adjustable item used to set the minimum position of the reheat valve when the PI loop is active.

RH Dec Rate

is an adjustable item used to set the rate of decrease for the reheat valve, where the unit leaves the dehumidification operation.

Energy Recovery Set-up

The Energy Recovery Set-up menu contains parameters that relate to or are used to control the enthalpy wheel and exhaust fan when a unit is equipped with an optional energy recovery wheel system.

Table 29: Energy Recovery

Item Display Name

Energy Rvcy=

ER Wheel=

Wheel Speed=

Whl Spd Cmd=

ER LAT=

ER EAT=

Min ExhT Diff=

Max ExhT Diff=

ER Whl Stg Tm=

ER Whl Off Tm=

Rel Humidity=

Min Whl Spd

Intersect Pt=

Fst Mgmt Meth=

OA Fst Temp=

Defrost Time=

Defrst Period=

Defrst On Tm=

Defrst Off Tm=

ER Whl Period=

ER Whl Gain=

ER Whl PAT=

ER Max Chg=

Default Setting

Timed

-20 .56°C

5min

60min

1s

24s

30 .0s

1 .0

30 .0s

10%

2 .0°F

6 .0°F

5min

20min

5%

Yes

Range

Yes, No

On, Off

0–100%

0–100%

-50 .0–200 .0°F

–50 .0–200 .0°F

1 .0–20 .0°F

1 .0–20 .0°F

1–100min

1–100min

0–100%

0–100%

-146 .2 .0–150 .0°F

Timed ExhAir

-40 .0 – 37 .78°C

0–60min

0–1440min

0–999s

0–999s

0–999 .0s

0–100

0–999 .0s

0–100%

Password Level

2

2

4

2

4

4

4

2

2

2

4

4

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

46 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Energy Rvcy

is an adjustable item which turns the optional energy recovery system on /off.

ER Wheel

is a status only item used to indicate whether the energy recovery wheel is currently on or off.

Wheel Speed

is a status only item that indicates the energy wheel variable speed supply air fan speed.

Wheel Spd Cmd

is a status only item that indicates the current energy wheel variable speed supply air fan commanded speed.

ER LAT

is status only item which displays the current discharge air temperature leaving the optional energy recovery wheel.

ER EAT

is status only item which displays the current exhaust air temperature leaving the optional energy recovery wheel.

Min Exh T Diff

is an adjustable item that sets a differential below the calculated potential energy recovery exhaust air frosting point. When the ER Exh T falls below the calculated frosting point by more that this value, the energy wheel will be driven to its minimum speed, or turned off, to prevent frosting.

Max Exh T Diff

is an adjustable item that sets a differential above the calculated potential energy recovery exhaust air frosting point. Once the wheel is driven to minimum speed, or turned off, to prevent frosting, it is driven back to maximum speed, or turned on, only when ER Exh T rises back above the calculated frosting point by more that this value.

ER Whl Stg Tm

is an adjustable item used to set a minimum time period for operating at either the minimum or maximum speed before action is taken to change speed during the frost protect mode of operation.

ER Whl Off Tm

is an adjustable item used to set the minimum amount of time the energy wheel will remain off after being turned off due to a frosting/condensation condition.

Rel Humidity

is a status only item that indicates the current relative humidity reading of the sensor.

Min Whl Spd

is an adjustable item used to set the energy recovery minimum wheel speed.

Intersect Pt

is a status only item used to indicate the current intersection point value from the psychometric chart where potential for wheel frosting exists.

Fst Mgmt Meth

is an adjustable item used to select the frost protection method to be used on a constant speed energy wheel application.

OA Fst Temp

is an adjustable item used to set the outside air frost temperature.

Defrost Time

is an adjustable item used to set the duration of a defrost cycle.

Defrst Period

is an adjustable item used to set how often a defrost cycle will be initiated.

Defrst On Tm

is an adjustable item used to select how long the constant speed energy wheel is energized during defrost.

Defrst Off Tm

is an adjustable item used to select how long the constant speed energy wheel is de-energized during defrost.

ER Whl Period

an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time” used in the PI control function.

ER Whl Gain

is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in the PI control function.

ER Whl PAT

is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead time” used in the PI control function.

ER Max Chg

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum value for an increase or decrease of the energy recovery wheel speed.

OM 920-4 47

Menu Descriptions

Head Pressure Set-Up Menu

The Head Pressure Set-Up menu contains parameters that are used to maintain head pressure control.

Table 30: Head Pressure Setup Menu

Item Display Name

Wtr Reg Vlv=

Head P Circ 1=

Head P Circ 2=

Setpoint=

Head Press DB=

WRV Period=

WRV Gain=

WRV PAT=

WRV Max Chg=

WRV Init Tm=

Min WRV Pos=

Min WRV Tmp=

Max WRV Tmp=

WRV Act Time=

Min WRV Time=

Default Setting

10s

7%

60s

10%

58°F

105°F

130s

60s

260psi

10psi

10s

3 .6

Wtr Reg Vlv

is a status only item that indicates the current water regulating valve position.

Head P Circ 1

is a status only item that indicates the current refrigerant pressure for circuit 1.

Head P Circ 2

is a status only item that indicates the current refrigerant pressure for circuit 2.

Setpoint

is an adjustable item that sets the refrigerant setpoint used for controlling the water regulating valve.

The water-regulating valve is modulated to maintain the refrigerant pressure.

Head Press DB

is an adjustable item that sets a deadband around the Head Pressure Setpoint parameter.

WRV Period

is an adjustable item which sets the “sampling time” used in the PI control function of the water regulating valve.

WRV Gain

is an adjustable item which sets the “Gain” used in the PI control function of the water regulating valve.

WRV PAT

is an adjustable item which sets the “project ahead time” used in the PI control function of the water regulating valve.

WRV Max Chg

is an adjustable item that sets the maximum value for an increase or decrease of the water regulating valve.

Range

0–100%

0–750psi

0–750psi

230–340psi

0–50psi

0–999s

0 .0–100 .0

0–999s

0–100%

0–3600s

0–100%

20–150°F

20–150°F

0–300s

0–3600s

Password Level

2

2

2

2

4

4

2

2

4

4

6

4

6

6

6

WRV Init Tm

is an adjustable item that sets a minimum time period that the WRV remains at an initial startup position

(InitPos) during the WRV start sequence..

Min WRV Pos

is an adjustable item used which sets the minimum WRV position used in the WRV start sequence

(default 10%).

Min WRV Tmp

is an adjustable item which is used to set the edited temperature where WRV at a minimum position does not result in a high pressure condition.This is used in the

WRV start sequence.

Max WRV Tmp

is an adjustable item which is used to set the edited temperature where WRV at 100% does not result in a low pressure condition.This is used in the WRV start sequence.

WRV Act Time

is an adjustable item which is used to set the time required for the WRV to be driven from 0 to 100%.

Min WRV Time

is an adjustable item which sets the minimum

WRV time (default 60 seconds) used in the WRV start sequence.

48 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Evap Cond Set-Up Menu

Table 31: Evap Condensing Menu

Item Display Name

Cond Fan Spd=

CFan Spd Cmd=

Min Fan Speed=

EvCond Stg Tm=

Sump Temp=

Min Sump T=

Max Sump T=

Sump Dump Spt=

Cndtvy=

Hi Cndtvy Spt=

SmpWtrLvlDly=

PostClgTime=

SepFlshTime=

Dolphin Sys=

Default Setting

-

-

33%

10min

-

75 .0°F

85 .0°F

35 .0°F

-

1100 S/cm

5mim

10min

1min

No

Range

0-100%

0-100%

0-100%

0-100min

-50 .0-150 .0°F

0 .0-100 .0°F

0 .0-100 .0°F

0 .0-100 .0°F

0-5000S/cm

0-5000S/cm

0-60min

0-60min

0-60min

No

Yes

Password Level

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

Cond Fan Speed

is a status only item that displays the current VFD speed when the evaporative condenser option includes a VFD to control the first condenser fan on each circuit.

Cond Fan Spd Cmd

is a status only item that indicates the current condenser fan VFD commanded speed.

Min Fan Speed

is an adjustable item used to set the minimum speed for the VFD speed when the evaporative condenser option includes a VFD to control the first condenser fan on each circuit.

EvCond Stg Tm

is an adjustable item used to set a minimum time period between condenser fan stage changes.

Sump Temp

is a status only item that displays the current evaporative condenser sump temperature.

Min Sump T

is an adjustable item used to set a minimum evaporative condenser sump temperature set point. This value is used to determine when condenser fans are turned off.

Max Sump T

is an adjustable item used to set a maximum evaporative condenser sump temperature set point. This value is used to determine when condenser fans should be turned on.

Sump Dump Spt

is an adjustable item used to set a minimum sump temperature. The sump is emptied to prevent freezing if the sump temperature drops below this set point.

Sump Pump Status

is a status only item that displays the current evaporative condenser sump pump status.

Smp Pmp Delay

adjustable item used to set the amount of time the sump pump fail alarm is delayed. If the Sump Pump status remains Off after the Sump Pump Output has been turned on for more than the Sump Pump Delay time, a Sump

Pump fail alarm is initiated.

Conductivity

is a status only item that displays the conductivity level of the water in the sump of an evaporative cooled condenser on rooftop units.

Hi Cndtvy Spt

is an adjustable item that sets the alarm value setpoint used to generate a conductivity problem alarm

SmpWtrLvlDly

is an adjustable item that sets the amount of time sump water level input is ignored once the unit enters the cooling state

PostClgTime

is an adjustable item that sets the amount of time the sump pump output remains on after the unit leaves the cooling state.

SepFlshTime

is an adjustable item that sets the amount of time the Purge Valve Binary Output is turned on to flush the solids out of the system separator.

Dolphin System

is an adjustable parameter that indicates to the controller whether or not a Dolphin water treatment method is being used. When set to “yes” the controller assures the sump pump is run every three days to reduce scaling.

OM 920-4 49

Menu Descriptions

Alarm Configuration Menu

Alarm Limits Menu

The Alarm Limits menu is used to set the limits of the discharge air temperature sensor and the return air temperature sensor.

Table 32: Alarm Limits Setup Menu

Item Display Name

Hi Disch Temp=

Lo Disch Temp=

Hi Return Temp=

Default Setting

170°F

40°F

120°F

Hi Disch Alm

is an adjustable item that sets the high temperature limit for the DAT sensor. When the discharge air temperature sensor reaches this set point the unit will go into the high discharge air alarm.

Lo Disch Alm

is an adjustable item that sets the low temperature limit for the DAT sensor. When the discharge air temperature sensor reaches this set point the unit will go into the low discharge air alarm.

Hi Return Alm

is an adjustable item that sets the high temperature limit for the return air temperature. When the

RAT sensor reaches this set point the unit will go into the high return air temperature alarm.

Alarm Output Config Menu

Table 33:

Alarm Out Configuration Setup Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting

Faults= Fast

Problems=

Warnings=

Slow

Off

The digital alarm output indicates the alarm group that contains the highest priority active alarm. This output is On when no alarms are active. The options for the action of this output when an alarm in a group occurs are On, Fast Blink,

Slow Blink, or Off. These can be edited via the keypad/ display.

Range

90–250°F

-50–50°F

90–150°F

Password Level

4

4

4

Range

On

Off

Fast

Slow

On

Off

Fast

Slow

On

Off

Fast

Slow

Password Level

4

4

4

The default values for the three groups of alarms are:

• Warnings - Off

• Problems - Slow Blink

• Faults - Fast Blink

A user could eliminate any signal of a particular group of alarms through this output by selecting On for that alarm group in the keypad/display.

50 OM 920-4

Alarm Delays Menu

The Alarm Delays Setup Menu can be accessed when a level

2 password has been entered. The default settings are the result of many years of testing and should not be changed.

Table 34: Alarm Delays Setup Menu

Item Display Name

OffHtClDelay=

Frz DelayTime=

LP Delay=

LP Comp Delay=

Aflw Ignr Tm=

Sens Alm Dly=

Temp Alm Dly=

Default Setting

120s

30s

2s

5s (410A)

65s (R22/407C)

120s

30s

30s

Alarm Config

Emerg Stop= Man Clr

OffHtClDelay

is an adjustable item that is used to set the duration the supply fan will remained energized when a unit transitions to the off state while DX cooling or staged heating is active.

Frz DelayTime

is an adjustable item used to set the freeze alarm delay time.

LP Delay

is an adjustable item used to set the low pressure switch delay time.

LP Comp Delay

is an adjustable item used to set the low pressure compressor delay time.

Aflw Ignr Tm

is an adjustable item that sets the amount of time the air proving switch is ignored after the supply fan is started.

Sens Alm Dly

is an adjustable item used to set the sensor alarm delay time.

Temp Alm Dly

is an adjustable item used to set the temperature alarm delay time

Emerg Stop

is an adjustable item used to set the emergency shutdown to either manual or automatic restart.

Range

0–999s

0–180s

0–10s

0–300s

0–999s

0–300s

0–300s

Man Clr

Auto Clr

Menu Descriptions

Password Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

OM 920-4 51

Menu Descriptions

Manual Control

The manual control of operation is a function that is used for operating the unit during a service call only. The unit must not be operated in this mode for any extended period of time.

Table 35: Manual Control Menu

Item Display Name

Manual Ctrl=

Supply Fan=

SAF Spd Cmd=

RF/EF VFD=

RF/EF Spd Cmd=

OAD/Econo=

OAD OpCl=

Comp 1 =

Comp 2 =

Comp 3 =

Comp 4 =

Comp 5 =

Comp 6 =

Comp 7 =

Comp 8 =

U1 Comp 1=

U1 Comp 2=

U2 Comp 1=

U2 Comp 2=

Cfan Outpt 1=

Cfan Outpt 2=

Cfan Outpt 3=

BP/WR Valve=

CW Valve=

ExhFan Out 1=

ExhFan Out 2=

ECond VFD=

ECFan Spd Cmd=

EC Drn Valve=

Sump Pump=

Sep Flsh Vlv=

SV1=

SV2=

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Default Setting

Normal

Off

0%

Off

0%

0%

Close

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

0%

Close

Off

Off

0%

0%

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

0-100%

0-100%

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

0-100%

Close

Open

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Range

Normal

ManCtrl

Off

On

0-100%

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

0-100%

0-100%

Close

Open

Off

On

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

Password Level

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

52 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Table 35 continued: Manual Control Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting

GasHtg OnOff=

Htg Valve=

SCR Out=

F&BP Damper=

Htg Stg 1=

Off

0%

0%

0%

Off

SCR Ena 1=

Htg Stg 2=

SCR Ena 2=

Htg Stg 3=

Htg Stg 4=

Htg Stg 5=

Htg Stg 6=

Reheat Valve=

RH Output=

LSCRH Valve=

HGBP Valve=

ERec Wheel=

ER Whl Cmd=

ERBP Dmpr Cl=

ERBP Dmpr Op=

Cond Wtr Pump=

Alm Output=

Fan Op Out=

Off

Off

Off

0%

Off

0%

Off

Off

0%

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Range

Off

On

0-100%

0-100%

0-100%

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

0-100%

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

Off

On

0-100%

Off

On

Off

On

0-100%

Off

On

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

Password Level

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

Manual Ctrl

is an adjustable item that puts the unit into manual control. Major components of the unit are turned on and off by this control. The units normal control sequences are overridden in this state with the exception of all the

“fault” alarms and the cooling circuit high pressure and low pressure alarms.

Supply Fan

is an adjustable item that turns on the supply fan.

RF/EF

is an adjustable item that turns on the return/exhaust fan.

SAF Spd Cmd

is an adjustable item only on VAV units that sets the speed of the supply air fan.

RF/EF Spd Cmd

is an adjustable item for units with VFD on the return/exhaust fans that sets the speed of the return/ exhaust fan.

OAD/Econo

is an adjustable item which is used to set the economizer damper position.

OAD OpCl

is an adjustable item which is used to turn the

OA damper output on. This output is available only on self contained units.

Comp 1 OnOff

is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #1.

Comp 2 OnOff

is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #2.

Comp 3 OnOff

is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #3.

Comp 4 OnOff

is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #4.

Comp 5 OnOff

is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #5.

Comp 6 OnOff

is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #6.

Comp 7 OnOff

is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #7.

Comp 8 OnOff

is an adjustable item that turns on compressor #8.

U1 Comp 1

is an adjustable item the turns on unloader 1 on compressor 1.

U1 Comp 2

is an adjustable item the turns on unloader 1 on compressor 2.

U2 Comp 1

is an adjustable item the turns on unloader 2 on compressor 1.

OM 920-4 53

Menu Descriptions

U2 Comp 2

is an adjustable item the turns on unloader 2 on compressor 2.

CFan Outpt 1

is an adjustable item that turns on the condenser fan output #1.

CFan Outpt 2

is an adjustable item that turns on the condenser fan output #2.

CFan Outpt 3

is an adjustable item that turns on the condenser fan output #3.

NOTE:

Turning on any one of the compressors will automatically turn on the first condenser fan on the circuit . Other condenser fans must be manually turned on to control the head pressure of the unit .

Refrigerant gauges must be connected to the unit for observation of the head pressure in the manual control mode of operation . Additional condenser fans must be turned on to maintain the head pressure .

BP/WR Valve

is an adjustable item used to manually drive the bypass/water regulating valve open and closed.

CW Valve

is an adjustable item used to manually drive the chilled water valve open and closed.

Exh Fan Out 1

is an adjustable item that turns on Exhaust fan output # 1.

Exh Fan Out 2

is an adjustable item that turns on Exhaust fan output # 2.

ECond VFD

is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/off the evaporative cooling condenser fan VFD.

ECFan Spd Cmd

is an adjustable item which is used to set the evaporative cooling condenser fan VFD speed position.

EC Drn Valve

is an adjustable item which is used to open/ close the evaporative cooling drain valve.

Sump Pump

is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/ off the evaporative cooling sump pump.

Sep Flsh Vlv

is an adjustable item that turns on the Separator

Flush Valve output.

SV1

is an adjustable output that turns on the circuit 1 liquid line solenoid valve.

SV2

is an adjustable output that turns on the circuit 2 liquid line solenoid valve.

GasHtgOnOff

is an adjustable item used to manually turn the main gas valve output on/off.

Htg Valve

is an adjustable item used to manually drive the modulating heating valve open and closed.

SCR Out

is an adjustable item used to manually drive the output signal to the SCR.

F&BP Damper

is an adjustable item used to manually drive the F&BP damper open and closed.

Htg Stg 1

is an adjustable item that turns on the first stage of heat on units equipped with staged heating.

SCR Ena 1

is an adjustable item that enables the SCR heater.

Htg Stg 2

is an adjustable item that turns on the second stage of heat on units equipped with staged heating.

SCR Ena 1

is an adjustable item that enables the SCR heater.

Htg Stg 3

is an adjustable item that turns on the third stage of heat on units equipped with staged heating.

Htg Stg 4

is an adjustable item that turns on the fourth stage of heat on units equipped with staged heating.

Htg Stg 5

is an adjustable item that turns on the fifth stage of heat on units equipped with staged heating.

Htg Stg 6

is an adjustable item that turns on the sixth stage of heat on units equipped with staged heating.

Reheat Valve

is an adjustable item used to manually drive the reheat valve open and closed.

RH Output

is adjustable output that turns on the Reheat valve output.

LSCRH Valve

is adjustable output that turns on the Liquid

Subcooler Reheat Valve output

HGBP Valve

is an adjustable item used to manually drive the

HGBP Valve open and closed.

ERec Wheel

is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/off the energy recovery wheel output.

ERec Whl Cmd

is an adjustable item is an adjustable item which is used to set the energy recovery wheel VFD speed.

ERBP Dmpr Cl

is an adjustable item which is used to close the energy recovery bypass damper.

ERBP Dmpr OP

is an adjustable item which is used to open the energy recovery bypass damper.

Cond Wtr Pump

is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/off the condenser water pump output.

Alm Output

is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/off the alarm output.

FanOp

is an adjustable item which is used to turn on/off the fan operation output.

NOTE:

When Manual Control is set to ManCtrl, the Control

Mode is set to Off so that the unit will not restart automatically . When Manual Control is set to Normal all digital outputs in the Manual Control menu are set to Off and all the analog outputs are set to 0 .0% so that all outputs are in the Off or minimum position when Manual Control is set to ManCtrl .

54 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Service Menus

Timer Settings Menu

The Timer Settings Menu is also available from the

Commission Unit Menu, and is described on

page 29

Save/Restore Menu

The Save/Restore menu can be used to save or restore the user configured parameters as well as reset the controller back to the factory default parameters.

Table 36: Save/Restore Menu

Item Display Name

Save Params=

Rstr Params=

Rstr Factory=

SaveToCard=

LoadFromCard

Default Setting

No

No

No

No

No

Save Params

is an adjustable item used to save the current parameters and configuration.

Rstr Params

is an adjustable item used to restore the current parameters and configuration.

Rstr Factory

is an adjustable item used to restore the factory parameters and configuration.

Range

No/Yes

No/Yes

No/Yes

No/Yes

No/Yes

Password Level

2

2

2

2

2

SaveToCard

is an adjustable item used to save the current parameters and configuration to an SD card.

LoadFromCard

is an adjustable item used to restore the current parameters and configuration from an SD card.

NOTE:

The controller will automatically perform a reset when the value of Load From Card is changed from No to

Yes and the enter button is pushed .

Active Alarms Menu

All active alarms as well as the date and time that they were detected are displayed on the Active Alarm menu. These alarms are displayed in order of group priority: Faults first,

Problems second, and Warnings last. Within each group, alarms are displayed in the order that they were detected.

Table 37: Active Alarm Menu

Item Display Name

Active Alm Count=

Default Setting

Password Level

None

ClrAlms= No

Range

0–10

No

ClrFlts

ClrPrblms

ClrWrngs

ClrAllAlms

None

+Alarm 1:Alarm Type

+Alarm 2:Alarm Type

None

None

OM 920-4 55

Menu Descriptions

Alarm Log Menu

The last fifty alarm events (alarm detection and return to normal) as well as the date and times that they were detected are displayed on the Alarm Log menu. These alarm events are displayed in the order that they were detected. The alarm event that was detected most recently is displayed first.

Multiple occurrences of the same alarm may appear.

Table 38: Alarm Log Menu

Item Display Name

Log Alm Count=

ClrLog=

+Alarm 1:Alarm Type

+Alarm 2:Alarm Type

Default Setting

No

Once an alarm is cleared there will be two entries in the

Alarm Log. A (+) sign will be shown next to the entry added when the alarm became active and a (-) sign will be shown next to the entry added when the alarm has been cleared.

Alarm Configuration Menu

The Alarm Configuration menu is also available under the

Commission Unit menu. Refer to

page 50

.

Analog Input Status Menu

The Analog Input Status Menu provides diagnostic information to qualified service personnel. The items listed in this menu will provide current status information of the unit’s analog inputs. The value shown is the input resistance shown in 1/10th of an ohm scale. Example: MCB-AI1 (DAT sensor) shows a value of 181380, the actual resistance would be 18,138 ohms. This would translate to a temperature of 53.5 ºF.

Table 39: Analog Input Status Menu

Item Display Name

MCB-AI1=

MCB AI2=

MCB AI3=

Default Setting

Range

0–50

No

Yes

Range

0–99999999

0–99999999

0–99999999

Password Level

None

None

None

None

Password Level

2

2

2

56 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Universal I/O Status Menu

The Universal I/O Status Menu provides diagnostic information to qualified service personnel. The items listed in this menu will provide current status information of the Universal inputs and outputs. If the universal I/O is configured for resistance, the value will be displayed in 1/10th

Table 40: Universal I/O Status Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting

EMA X7=

EMA X8=

EMB X1=

EMB X2=

EMB X3=

EMB X4=

EMB X5=

EMB X6=

EMB X7=

EMB X8=

MCB X1=

MCB X2=

MCB X3=

MCB X4=

MCB X5=

MCB X6=

MCB X7=

MCB X8=

EMA X1=

EMA X2=

EMA X3=

EMA X4=

EMA X5=

EMA X6=

Range

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999 ohm scale. If the I/O is configured for mA, the value will be displayed in micro amps (1 mA = 1000 micro amps). If I/O is configured for voltage, the value is displayed in 1/1000th volt scale. Example: MCB-X7 (OA Damper analog output) shows a value of 3000, this would translate into 3 VDC.

Password Level Item Display Name

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

EMD X7=

EMD X8=

EME X1=

EME X2=

EME X3=

EME X4=

EME X5=

EME X6=

EME X7=

EME X8=

EMC X1=

EMC X2=

EMC X3=

EMC X4=

EMC X5=

EMC X6=

EMC X7=

EMC X8=

EMD X1=

EMD X2=

EMD X3=

EMD X4=

EMD X5=

EMD X6=

Default Setting

Range

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

0–9999999

Password Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

OM 920-4 57

Menu Descriptions

Digital Input Status Menu

The Digital Input Status Menu provides diagnostic information to qualified service personnel. The items listed in this menu will provide current status information of the controller’s digital inputs.

Table 41: Digital Input Status Menu

Item Display Name

MCB DI1=

MCB-DI2=

MCB DI3=

MCB DI4=

MCB DI5=

MCB DI6=

Default Setting

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Range

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Digital Output Status Menu

The Digital Output Status Menu provides diagnostic information to qualified service personnel. The items listed in this menu will provide current status information of the controller’s digital outputs.

Table 42: Digital Output Status Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting

MCB DO1=

MCB DO2=

Off

Off

MCB DO3=

MCB DO4=

MCB DO5=

MCB DO6=

MCB DO7=

MCB DO8=

MCB DO9=

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

MCB DO10=

EMA DO1=

EMA DO2=

EMA DO3=

EMA DO4=

EMA DO5=

EMA DO6=

EMB DO1=

EMB DO2=

EMB DO3=

EMB DO4=

EMB DO5=

EMB DO6=

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Range

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Password Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Item Display Name Default Setting

EMC DO1=

EMC DO2=

Off

Off

EMC DO3=

EMC DO4=

EMC DO5=

EMC DO6=

EMD DO1=

EMD DO2=

EMD DO3=

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

EMD DO4=

EMD DO5=

EMD DO6=

EME DO1=

EME DO2=

EME DO3=

EME DO4=

EME DO5=

EME DO6=

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Range

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Off/On

Password Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

Password Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

58 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Network Input Status Menu

The Network Input Status Menu provides diagnostic information to qualified service personnel. The items listed in this menu will provide current status information of the controller’s network inputs.

Table 43: Network Input Status Menu

Item Display Name

Net OAT In=

Net SpaceT In=

NetCurrState=

Default

Setting

Range

(No Network value in Bold)

-50 .0–200 .0°F

(621 .8°F)

-0 .0–150 .0°F

(621 .8°F)

Occ

Unocc

TntOvrd

Standby

Auto

NetNextState=

NetTmToNxtSt=

Net App Mode=

Net Cl Ena Sw=

(NULL)

Occ

Unocc

TntOvrd

Standby

Auto

(NULL)

0–65534min

(65535min)

Off

HeatOnly

CoolOnly

FanOnly

Auto

(Auto)

-1 .0–1 .0(-1 .0)

Password

Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Item Display

Name

Net Cl Ena Vl=

Net Ht Ena Sw=

Net Ht Ena Vl=

Net Ec Ena Sw=

Net Ec Ena Vl=

Net SAF Cap=

Net ExhF Cap=

Net Space IAQ=

Net Rel Humid=

Net DATClgSpt=

Net DATHtgSpt= nviSetpoint=

OccManCmd=

Net MinOA= nvoEffSpt= nciOccClgSpt= nciOccHtgSpt= nciHVACType=

Default

Setting

Range

(No Network value in Bold)

0–255% (255%)

-1 .0–1 .0 (-1 .0)

0–255% (255%)

-1 .0–1 .0 (-1 .0)

0-255% (255%)

0–100% (164%)

0–100% (164%)

0–5000ppm

(65535ppm)

0-100% (164%)

40 .0–100 .0°F

40 .0–140 .0°F

0 .0-100 .0°F

(621 .8°F)

Occ

Unocc

TntOvrd

Standby

Auto

0–100%

0 .0–100 .0°F

0 .0–100 .0°F

0 .0–100 .0°F

HVT_GEN

Password

Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

OM 920-4 59

Menu Descriptions

Modbus Status Menu

The Modbus Status Menu provides diagnostic information to qualified service personnel. The items listed provide the status of the Modbus communications with the various devices controlled by the internal Modbus network

Table 44: Modbus Status Menu

Item Display Name

SF MB Status=

RFEF MB Status=

ER MB Status=

IFB MB Status=

D3 MB Status=

MB Resistance=

ECM Config=

Default Setting

Yes

Done

SF MB Status

is a status only item which indicates the status of the Modbus communications between the main controller and the supply fan motor.

RFEF MB Status

is a status only item which indicates the status of the Modbus communications between the main controller and the return/exhaust fan motor.

Range

Fault/OK

Fault/OK

Fault/OK

Fault/OK

Fault/OK

Yes/No

Set Add 1

Set Add 2

Set AICtl

Password Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

ER MB Status

is a status only s item which indicates the status of the Modbus communications between the main controller and the energy recover wheel variable speed supply air fan.

D3 Status Menu

The D3 Status menu is provided for viewing the status of an interface with the unit via a D3 gateway. Refer to IM 1133

DIII-Net Communication Gateway for detailed information.

Table 45: D3 Status Menu

Item Display Name Default Setting

D3 Comm Sts= —

D3 Addr Err= —

D3 On/Off= —

D3 Mode=

D3 Clg Spt=

D3 Htg Spt=

D3 SAF Spd=

D3 Min Load=

D3 Max Load=

D3 Eco Ena=

OA Enthalpy=

Range

OK

Error

OK

Error

On

Off

Auto

Cooling

Heating

Fan

0–100ºF

0–120ºF

NA

Low

Med

High

0–100%

0–100%

Enabled

Disabled

0–86 BTU/lb

Password Level

2

2

2

2

Item Display Name Default Setting

OA Hum Ratio= g/kg

D3 SWVers=

OAAdd1–16=

OAAdd17–32=

OAAdd33–49= —

OAAdd50–64= —

SetOAAddr=

CurrOAAddr=

CurrOAAmps=

CurrOARLA=

0

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Range

0–30 g/Kg

XXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXX

0–64

0–64

0–200A

0–200A

Password Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

60 OM 920-4

Sensor Offsets Menu

The Sensor Offsets Menu provides a means of calibrating the various temperature sensor inputs to the unit. Each sensor can be “biased” by as much as +/- 10.0°F.

Table 46: Sensor Offset Menu

Item Display Name

Disch Air=

Return Air=

SpaceTemp=

OA Temp=

ER LAT=

ER EAT=

Default Setting

0 .0°F

0 .0°F

0 .0°F

0 .0°F

0 .0°F

0 .0°F

Range

0 .0-10 .0°F

0 .0-10 .0°F

0 .0-10 .0°F

0 .0-10 .0°F

0 .0-10 .0°F

0 .0-10 .0°F

Menu Descriptions

Password Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

OM 920-4 61

Menu Descriptions

Unit Maintenance

Operating Hours

The Operating Hours menu gives a summary of the hours of operation for each of the supply fans, return/exhaust fans, compressors, heating and economizer operation.

Table 47: Operating Hours Menu

Item Display Name

Supply Fan=

Ret/Exh Fan=

Mech Cool=

Comp # 1=

Comp # 2=

Comp # 3=

Comp # 4=

Comp # 5=

Comp # 6=

Comp # 7=

Comp # 8=

Heating=

Economizer=

Tnt Override=

Dehumid=

ER Wheel=

Exh Out 1=

Exh Out 2=

Reheat=

Default Setting

Supply Fan

is a status item which gives the number of hours the supply fan has operated.

Return/Exhaust Fan

is a status item which gives the number of hours the return/exhaust fans have operated.

Mech Cool

is a status item which gives the number of hours that mechanical cooling has operated.

Comp #1

is a status item which gives the number of hours that compressor #1 has operated.

Comp #2

is a status item which gives the number of hours that compressor #2 has operated.

Comp #3

is a status item which gives the number of hours that compressor #3 has operated.

Comp #4

is a status item which gives the number of hours that compressor #4 has operated.

Comp #5

is a status item which gives the number of hours that compressor #5 has operated.

Comp #6

is a status item which gives the number of hours that compressor #6 has operated.

Comp #7

is a status item which gives the number of hours that compressor #7 has operated.

Comp #8

is a status item which gives the number of hours that compressor #8 has operated.

Range

0–50000H

0–50000H

0–50000H

0–50000H

0–50000H

0–50000H

0–50000H

0–50000H

0–50000H

0–50000H

0–50000H

0–50000H

0–50000H

0–50000H

0–50000H

0–50000H

0-50000h

0-50000h

0-50000h

Password Level

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

4

4

4

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

Heating

is a status item which gives the number of hours that the heating mode has operated.

Economizer

is a status item which gives the number of hours that the economizer has operated.

Tnt Override

is a status item which gives the number of hours that the unit has operated in the Tenant Override mode of operation.

Dehumid

is a status item which gives the number of hours that the dehumidification has operated.

ER Wheel

is a status item which gives the number of hours that the energy recovery wheel has operated.

Exh Out 1

is a status item which gives the number of hours the first stage exhaust fan has operated.

Exh Out 2

is a status item which gives the number of hours the second stage exhaust fan has operated.

Reheat

is a status item which gives the number of hours the

Reheat has operated

62 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

BMS Communications Menu

LON/BACnetIP/BACnetMSTP Setup Menu

See the Installation & Maintenance Manuals below for detailed instructions

• IM 916 MicroTech III Rooftop unit controller - BACnet

IP communications

• IM 917 MicroTech III Rooftop unit controller - BACnet

MSTP communications

• IM 918 MicroTech III Rooftop unit controller - BACnet

LON communications

Network Unit Set-up Menu

The Network Unit Set-up menu provides one location for the Set-up of items that can be controlled via a network BMS system.

Table 48: Network Unit Set-up Menu

Item Display Name

Space Sensor=

Ctrl Mode=

Occ Mode=

Clg Reset=

Htg Reset=

AplyMinOAChg=

Min OA Reset=

Default

Setting

Range

Digtl/Net

Unit Mode Settings

Off

Auto/Net

Off

Heat Only

Cool Only

Fan Only

Heat/Cool

Auto/Net

Occ

Unocc

TntOvrd

Auto/Net

Reset Options

None

Anlog/Net

Digtl/Net

None

None

No

None

None

Network

Space

Return

OAT

ExtmA

ExtV

Airflow

None

Network

Space

Return

OAT

ExtmA

ExtV

Airflow

No, Yes

None

Network

Ext VDC

Ext mA

IAQ VDC

IAQ mA

Password

Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Item Display Name

Ctrl Temp Src=

AplyTstatChg=

UseTstatSpt=

Oc c Clg Spt=

Occ Htg Spt=

SAF Ctrl=

RFEF

Default

Setting

Range

Heat/Cool Changeover

RAT

No

No

72 .0°F

68 .0°F

RAT

Space

MAT

OAT

None

No

Yes

No

Yes

0 .0-100 .0°F

0 .0-100 .0°F

Fan Control Options

DSP

Spd/Net

DSP

BldgP

1ZnVAV

BPS

CO2

CFM

None

Tracking

BldgP

Spd/Net

OA Damper

Password

Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

OM 920-4 63

Menu Descriptions

Unit Configuration

Unit Configuration Setup Menu

After the main control board application software is loaded into the MCB, it must be “configured” for the specific control application. This consists of setting the value of 25 configuration variables within the MCB. These variables define things such as the type of cooling, number of compressors and cooling stages and the type of heat. If all of these items are not set appropriately for the specific unit, the unit will not function properly. The correct settings for these parameters are defined for a given unit by the unit “Software

Configuration Code.”

The “Software Configuration Code” consists of a

29-character string of numbers and letters. The code can be

Table 49:

Unit Configuration Menu

Configuration Code Position

Description

1

2

3

4

5

6

Unit Type

Control Type

Cooling Type

Compressorized Cooling

Configuration

Generic Condenser Stages

Low Ambient found on the Unit Software Identification Label located on the back side of the control panel door.

Table 49 lists the configuration code variables including the

position within the code, description of the parameter, and the applicable settings for each. The default values are shown in bold font. The unit is configured at the factory however may also be configured in the field by accessing the Unit

Configuration Menu. Once changes have been made to the

Unit Configuration Menu, the Apply Changes flag must be changed from no to yes in order for the controller to recognize the changes. Setting the Apply Changes flag to yes will automatically rest the controller.

Values (Default in Bold)

0=Applied Rooftop (RTU)

1=Self-Contained (SCU)

2=Commercial Rooftop (MPS)

3=Rebel Cool Only (DPS)

4=Rebel Heat Pump (DPH)

0=Zone Control

1=DAT Control

2=1ZoneVAV

0 = None

1=Standard Compressorized

Clg

2=Chilled Water

3=F&BP

4=Inverter Compressorized Clg

0=None

1=Generic Condenser

2=2Cmp/2Circ/3Stg

3=3Cmp/2Circ/4Stg

4=2Cmp/2Circ/2or6Stg (6 stg if

7=2,3,4or5)

5=3Cmp/3Circ/3Stg_NoWRV

6=3Cmp/3Circ/3Stg_WRV

7=4Cmp/2Circ/4Stg

8=4Cmp/4Circ/4Stg_NoWRV

9=4Cmp/4Circ/4Stg_WRV

A=6Cmp/2Circ/6Stg

B=6Cmp/6Circ/6Stg_NoWRV

C=6Cmp/6Circ/6Stg_WRV

D=3Cmp/2Circ/5Stg

E=4Cmp/2Circ/5or8Stg (8 stg if

7=2,3,4or5)

F=8Cmp/4Circ/8Stg

G=8Cmp/8Circ/8Stg

H=6Cmp/3Circ/6Stg

I=Not Used

J=Spare

K=Spare

L=1INV/1Circ

M=1INV/1STD/1Circ

1 – 8 Stages (default = 8)

0 = No

1 = Yes

Special Condition

This position is applicable only when Position 3=1 .

This position is applicable only when Position 4=1 .

This position currently has no effect on unit operation .

RTU MPS DPS DPH SCU

64 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Table 49 continued: Unit Configuration Menu

Configuration Code Position

7

8

9

10

11

12, 13, 14

15

16

17

18

19

Description

Condenser Control

Damper Type

OA Flow Station

Heating Type

Max Heating Stages

Max Heat Rise

Supply Fan Type

Return Fan Type

Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity

Control Method

Second Duct Pressure Sensor

Entering Fan Temp Sensor

Values (Default in Bold)

0=Std Method 1

1=Std Method 2

2=Evap ABB

3=Evap MD2

4=Evap MD3

5=Evap DF

6=Not Used

7=EBM

8=INV

0=None

1=Single Position 30%

2=Single Position 100%

3=Economizer Airside

4=Economizer Waterside

5=100%OA_DOAS

6=AirEcon_DOAS

7=30%_DOAS

0=None

1=DF_015-030 (800)

2=DF_036-042 (802)

3=DF_045-075 (047)

4=DF_080-135 (077)

5=Generic Flow Station

6=Generic Flow Station w/CO

2

7=Ebtron MB

0=None

1=F&BP Control

2=Staged

3=Modulated Gas, 3-1

4=Modulated Gas 20-1

5=Steam or Hot Water

6=SCR Electric

7=MPSLoGas

8=MPSHiGas

1-8 Stages (default = 1)

Three Digits (default = 100)

0=Constant Volume

1=VFD/ABB

2=VFD/DF

3=VFD/MD2

4=VFD/MD3

5=VFD/MD6

6=EBMVAV

7=EBMCAV

0=CAV

1=RF_EF VFD/ABB

2=RF_EF VFD/DF

3=RF_EF VFD/MD2

4=RF_EF VFD/MD3

5=RF_EF VFD/MD6

6=PrpEx VFD/ABB

7=PrpEx VFD/DF

8=PrpEx VFD/MD2

9=PrpEx VFD/MD3

A=PrpEx VFD/MD6

B=None

C=1StageExh

D=2StageExh

E=3StageExh

F=EBMVAV

G=EBMCAV

Special Condition

This Position is applicable only when Position 1=0 or 2(RTU or MPS) .

Values 1 & 2 only apply if Postion 1 = 0 (RTU) or

Position 1=2 (MPS)

Value 4 only applies if Position 1 = 1 (SCU)

This position is only valid if

Position 1 = 0 or 2 (RTU or

MPS) and Position 8 = 3

Values 3 and 4 are valid selections only if

Position 1 = 0 (RTU)

Values 7 and 8 are valid selections only if

Position 1 = 2 (MPS)

This value is only valid if:

Position 10=2,3,4, 6, 7 or 8

This position valid only when

Position 1=0 (RTU) or Position

1 = 2 (MPS) .

0=None

1=Tracking

2=Building Pressure

3=Speed

4=OADamper

This position is valid only when Position 1 = 0 (RTU) or

Position 1 = 2 (MPS) .

A value of 1 is only valid if

Position 16=1 through 5 .

A value of 2 or 3 is only valid if

Position 16 = 1 through A .

0=No

1= Yes

0=No

1=Yes

RTU MPS DPS DPH SCU

OM 920-4 65

Menu Descriptions

Table 49 continued: Unit Configuration Menu

Configuration Code Position

Description

20

21

Energy Recovery

Cooling Circuit Type

Values (Default in Bold)

0=None

1=ConstSpdWhl/NoRH

2=VarSpdWhl/Danfoss

3=VarSpdWhl/MD2

4=VarSpdWhl/MD3

5=VarSpdWhl/ABB

6=ConstSpdWhl/wRH

0=Individual

1=2, 3 or 4 Circ . Water Condenser

2=2 Circ . Air Condenser

22

23

24, 25, 26

27

28

29

Head Pressure Control

Bypass Valve Control

Unit Size

Refrigerant Type

Reheat Type

Unit Voltage

0=No

1=Yes

0=Slave

1=Bypass

Three digits (default 050)

0=R22

1=R407C

2=R410A

0=None

1=StgHG

2=ModHG

3=StdHtRht

4=ModLSC

5=ModHG&LSC

0=208/60Hz

1=230/60Hz

2=460/60Hz

3=575/60Hz

4=208/50Hz

5=230/50Hz

6=460/50Hz

7=575/50Hz

Special Condition

This position is valid only when Position 1 = 0 (RTU) or

Position 1 = 2 (MPS) .

Values 0 and 1 are valid only when Position 1 = 1 (SCU)

This position is valid only when

Position 1 = 1 (SCU) .

This position is valid only when

Position 1 = 1 (SCU) .

RTU MPS DPS DPH SCU

Alarm Lists Menu

The Alarm Lists Menu is also available from the Service

Menu and is described on

page 55

.

66 OM 920-4

Menu Descriptions

Trending Menus

The Trending Menus allow for setting up and managing onboard trending of up to 30 data points within the controller. This data can then be exported to an SD card. The trending memory will begin over-writing the oldest existing data in the controller’s memory when the allocated trending memory fills up. If an SD card is installed in the controllers

SD card reader slot, an automatic export of the data will occur every night at midnight.

Table 50: Trending Menu

Item Display

Name

Trending Ena=

Apply Chgs=

Sample Time=

TrendOnOff=

Export Data=

Clear Trend=

Default Setting

No

No

300s

Off

No

Done

Range

No

Yes

No

Yes

1–3600s

Off

On

No

Yes

Done

ClrData

ClrCfg

Password

Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

Trending Ena

is an adjustable item which enables and disables the on board trending function.

Apply Changes

is an adjustable item which must be set to make changes to trending point definitions and sampling rate take effect.

Sample Time

is an adjustable item used to the sampling rate for trending data points.

TrendOnOff

is an adjustable item which starts and stops the on board trending function.

Export Data

is an adjustable item which initiates a manual export of the current on board trend data to an SD card.

Clear Trend

is an adjustable item used to either clear only the current trend data or the entire trend configuration.

Points 1-8 (Fixed)

The first 8 trending points are fixed and will automatically be trended when ever the trending function is activated.

Table 51: Points 1-8 (Fixed)

Item Display

Name

Point 1=

Point 2=

Point 3=

Point 4=

Point 5=

Point 6=

Point 7=

Point 8=

Default Setting

UnitSt

Clg%

Htg%

SAF%

OAD/Eco%

CtrlTmp

DAT

OAT

Range

UnitSt

Clg%

Htg%

SAF%

OAD/Eco%

CtrlTmp

DAT

OAT

Password

Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Points 9-24 (From List)

Trending Points 9 through 16 can be selected from a primary list of available date points. Trending Points 17 through 24 can be selected from a secondary list of available date points.

See Appendix–page <?> for the primary and secondary listing of points.

Table 52: Points 9-4 (From List)

Item Display

Name

Point 9=

Point 10=

Point 11=

Point 12=

Point 13=

Point 14=

Point 15=

Point 16=

Point 17=

Point 18=

Point 19=

Point 20=

Point 21=

Point 22=

Point 23=

Point 24=

Default Setting

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

Range

Primary List

Primary List

Primary List

Primary List

Primary List

Primary List

Primary List

Primary List

Secondary List

Secondary List

Secondary List

Secondary List

Secondary List

Secondary List

Secondary List

Secondary List

Password

Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

OM 920-4 67

Menu Descriptions

Points 25-27 (With IDs)

Trending Points 25 through 27 can be freely selected all the available points and point members that exist within the controller. In this case the user must know and enter the point

ID number, point Type number and point Member number.

Factory assistance will generally be necessary to indentify this information for a specific point.

Table 53: Points 25-27 (With IDs)

Item Display

Name

ID=

Type=

Mem Num=

ID=

Type=

Mem Num=

ID=

Type=

Mem Num=

Default Setting

Point 25

F0AF0000

0000

0100

Point 26

F0AF0000

0000

0100

Point 27

F0AF0000

0000

0100

Range

00000000–

FFFFFFFF

0000–FFFF

0000–FFFF

00000000–

FFFFFFFF

0000–FFFF

0000–FFFF

00000000–

FFFFFFFF

0000–FFFF

0000–FFFF

Password

Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Points 28-30 (With IDs)

Trending Points 28 through 30 can be freely selected all the available points and point members that exist within the controller. In this case the user must know and enter the point

ID number, point Type number and point Member number.

Factory assistance will generally be necessary to indentify this information for a specific point.

Table 54: Points 28-30 (With IDs)

Item Display

Name

ID=

Type=

Mem Num=

ID=

Type=

Mem Num=

ID=

Type=

Mem Num=

Default Setting

Point 28

F0AF0000

0000

0100

Point 29

F0AF0000

0000

0100

Point 30

F0AF0000

0000

0100

Range

00000000–

FFFFFFFF

0000–FFFF

0000–FFFF

00000000–

FFFFFFFF

0000–FFFF

0000–FFFF

00000000–

FFFFFFFF

0000–FFFF

0000–FFFF

Password

Level

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

68 OM 920-4

Trending Selection Lists

Table 55: Primary Trending Select List

HMI Name

Bldg Press=

Clg State=

Clg Status=

Clg Press Lmtg=

Cmp Ratio Lmtg=

DAT Clg Spt=

Dehum Status=

DFT=

Ref DLT Lmtg=

DRT1=

DRT3=

Duct Press=

Econo Status=

EF/LC Temp=

ER EAT=

ER LAT=

EVI Pos=

EVO Pos=

EW Temp=

Htg Press Lmtg=

INV Brd Lmtg=

INV Cmp Spd=

Mixed Air=

Min OA Pos=

Occ Clg Spt=

OccSrc=

PTD=

PTS=

Return Air=

Reheat Cap=

RF/EF Cap=

Subcooling=

Space Temp=

SRT=

Superheat=

STD3=

Sump Temp=

UnoccSrc=

Unit Status =

Not all listed points may be available depending on the specific unit configuration

Select Abbreviation

BSP

ClgSt

ClgSts

ClPLmtg

CpRLmtg

DAClgSp

DeHmSts

DFT

DLLmtg

DRT1

DRT3

DSP

EcoSts

EFT/LCT

EREAT

ERLAT

EVI%

EVO%

EWT

HtPLmtg

IBLmtg

INV%

MAT

MinOA%

OcClgSp

OcSrc

PTD

PTS

RAT

ReHt%

RFEF%

SbClg

SpaceT

SRT

SSH

STD3

SumpT

UnOcSrc

UntSts

2203

2203

2203

230B

230B

2203

2203

2203

2203

230A

230B

2203

2203

2203

Type

2203

230B

230B

230B

230B

2300

230B

2203

230B

2203

230A

2203

2203

230A

2207

2203

230B

230B

230A

2300

230B

2203

2203

2203

230A

Menu Descriptions

ID

F0AFC4BB

F0AF3991

F0AFF6A6

F0AF3B4E

F0AF7BA2

F0AF64FD

F0AF56EA

F0AFCA19

F0AFB273

F0AFD8D7

F0AFF895

F0AF143C

F0AFC1AB

F0AF356B

F0AF0DBB

F0AFFD44

F0AF3028

F0AF17B1

F0AFCD6B

F0AF3FE7

F0AFBAB2

F0AFDA3E

F0AFCD1F

F0AFEEC9

F0AFF8A8

F0AFF838

F0AF229A

F0AF404C

F0AFA24D

F0AF00F8

F0AFAECF

F0AF842E

F0AFF74A

F0AFC35D

F0AFB846

F0AF03CC

F0AF503D

F0AFF6B4

F0AF4FF0

OM 920-4 69

Menu Descriptions

Table 56: Secondary Trending Select List

HMI Name

Alarm Enumeration

IAQ PPM=

Cmp Ratio Lmtg=

DAT Htg Spt=

Dewpoint=

Dewpoint Spt=

Defrost State=

Ref DLT Lmtg=

EF/LC Temp=

Wheel Speed=

EVI Pos=

EVO Pos=

EW Temp=

Head P Circ 1=

Head P Circ 2=

Htg State=

Htg Status=

Htg Press Lmtg=

INV Brd Lmtg=

INV Cmp Spd=

Mixed Air=

OA Flow=

MinOAFlw Spt=

Occ Htg Spt=

PTD=

PTS=

Return Air=

Rem ExhF Cap=

Rem RAF Cap=

Rem SAF Cap=

Rel Humidity=

RH Setpoint=

Reheat Spt=

Subcooling=

Space Temp=

SuplHtgStatus=

Superheat=

Supl Htg Cap=

STD3=

Not all listed points may be available depending on the specific unit configuration.

Select Abbreviation

Alm

CO2

CpRLmtg

DAHtgSp

Dewpt

DewptSp

DFSt

DLLmtg

EFT/LCT

ERWhl%

EVI%

EVO%

EWT

HdPr1

HdPr2

HtgSt

HtgSts

HtPLmtg

IBLmtg

INV%

MAT

OAFlw

OAFlwSp

OcHtgSp

PTD

PTS

RAT

RemEF%

RemRF%

RemSF%

RH

RHSp

RhtSp

SbClg

SpaceT

SpHtSts

SSH

SupHt%

STD3

230B

230B

230B

2203

2203

230A

2300

2203

2203

2203

2203

2203

2203

230B

Type

230A

2203

230B

2300

230A

2300

230B

230B

2203

2203

2300

230A

230A

2203

230B

230A

230A

2207

2300

2203

2203

2203

2300

2300

2300

ID

F0AFCF76

F0AF7F77

F0AF7BA2

F0AF6054

F0AF532C

F0AF75C1

F0AFBD68

F0AFB273

F0AF356B

F0AF101D

F0AF3028

F0AF17B1

F0AFCD6B

F0AFD3C4

F0AFE3A7

F0AF4BE8

F0AFD173

F0AF3FE7

F0AFBAB2

F0AFDA3E

F0AFCD1F

F0AFF10A

F0AF6B95

F0AF8A33

F0AF229A

F0AF404C

F0AFA24D

F0AF1969

F0AF57A7

F0AF211F

F0AF1DDC

F0AFFA18

F0AF335D

F0AF842E

F0AFF74A

F0AF7D21

F0AFB846

F0AF1FEA

F0AF03CC

70 OM 920-4

Alarms

Alarms

About this Unit

Table 57: About this Unit Menu

Menu Display Name

About this Unit

Item Display Name

SO_Item=

Unit SN=

App Version=

Cf1-15=

Cf16-29=

Main BSP=

LON BSP=

LON App Ver=

BACnet BSP=

D-Net BSP=

HMI GIUD=

OBH GIUD=

SO_Item

is an adjustable item which can be used to store the sales order number of the unit for reference purposes.

Unit SN

is an adjustable item which can be used to store the serial number of the unit for reference purposes.

App Version

is the version of application code loaded into the controller

Cf1-15

describe positions 1-15 of the unit configuration string

Cf16-29

describe positions 16-29 of the unit configuration string

Main BSP

is the current version of firmware in the main controller

LON BSP

is a status only item which indicates the current version of firmware in the LON communication module connected to the main controller.

LON App Ver

is a status only item which indicates the current version of application code in the LON communication module connected to the main controller.

BACnet BSP

is a status only item which indicates the current version of firmware in the BACnet communication module connected to the main controller.

D-Net BSP

is a status only item which indicates the current version of firmware in the D-Net communication module connected to the main controller.

HMI GUID

is the HMI software identifier number unique to each application code version

OBH GUID

is the OBH software identifier number unique to each application code version

Alarms

Alarms provide the user with information about abnormal conditions that affect unit operation. The cause of the alarm should be investigated and eliminated before the unit or any disabled equipment in it is placed back into service.

Faults

are conditions that are serious enough to shut down the unit. The alarm must be manually cleared to allow unit operation.

Problems

are conditions that result in some limitation of unit operation, but the unit is allowed to continue to operate. Some of these alarms must be cleared manually, but others clear automatically.

Warnings

inform the user of conditions that should be addressed, but do not limit operation in any way. The alarm condition needs to be fixed and the alarm must be manually cleared to cause this alarm to no longer be active.

All active alarms as well as the date and time that they were detected are displayed on the Active Alarm menu. These alarms are displayed in order of priority. Higher priority alarms are displayed first. The last fifty alarm “events” detected as well as the date and times that they were detected are displayed on the Alarm Log menu. An alarm “event” is either an alarm becoming active or being cleared. A “+” symbol precedes the active alarm event and a “-” symbol precedes the cleared alarm event. These alarms are displayed in the order that they were detected. The alarm that was detected most recently is displayed first. Multiple occurrences of the same alarm may appear.

Alarm Clearing

Active alarms can be cleared through the keypad/display or a

BAS network. Alarms are automatically cleared when power is cycled. Alarms are cleared only if the conditions required to initiate the alarm do not exist. All alarms and groups of alarms can be cleared via the network or keypad by setting the ClearAlms variable to a non-zero value as indicated in the table below. Emergency Off Faults can be set to automatically clear once the condition that caused the alarm is corrected.

This can be accomplished by navigating to Commission Unit/

Alarm Configuration/Emerg Stop and changing the default

ManClr value to AutoClr.

NOTE:

The enumeration text is what shows up on the keypad/display not the number . The value of this variable automatically reverts to zero when the alarms are cleared . This variable may be set through the keypad in the Active Alarm menu . It may be set via LON using nviClearAlarms and via BACnet using the ClearAlarms object .

Table 58: Alarm Clearing

Value

0

1

2

3

4

Action

None

Clear All Faults

Clear All Problems

Clear All Warnings

Clear All Alarms

OM 920-4 71

Alarms

Alarms

Warnings

Dirty Filter - (Dirty Filter: Warning)

If the pressure drop across the filter section in the unit exceeds the setting of the differential pressure switch the

Dirty Filter warning occurs. When the Dirty Filter warning occurs, unit operation is not affected. The Dirty Filter warning must be manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.

Airflow Switch - (Airflow Sw: Warning)

If the unit has been in the Off operating state for at least thirty minutes and the PC7 airflow switch input to the main controller indicates airflow, the Airflow Switch warning occurs. This normally indicates a problem with the PC7 airflow switch. When the Airflow Switch warning occurs, unit operation is not affected. When the alarm condition is corrected, the Airflow Switch warning must be manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.

Conductivity - (Conductivity: Warning)

If the unit is equipped with a Dolphin system and the

Conductivity value rises above the alarm setpoint value, the conductivity alarm occurs. When the alarm condition is corrected, the conductivity warning must be manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.

Return/Exh Fan Warning

When the unit is equipped with a Return/Exhaust fan VFD or

ECM motor and a loss of Modbus communications for longer than 10 seconds a Return/Exhaust fan warning alarm occurs.

The alarm is automatically clears when the condition causing the alarm is corrected.

Problems

No Water Flow Problem - (Water Flw Sw: Problem) (Self

Contained only)

When a unit is equipped with a water flow switch WFS, the

No Water Flow problem occurs when lack of water flow is indicated by an open water flow switch or a network signal and all of the following conditions are true:

• Lack of water flow is indicated by an open water flow switch or a Network signal

• Either of the following is true:

• The Bypass Valve has been opened greater than 50% for more than the Bypass Valve Timer

• A water side economizer is installed and its position is greater than 50%

• Unit is not in the Off, Start or Recirc operating state

When the No Water Flow problem occurs, the unit continues to operate however cooling provided by compressors disabled.

When all of the alarm condition are no longer present, the

No Water Flow problem normally clears automatically and normal unit operation resumes. If the alarm occurs three times between 2:00 am of one day and 2:00 am of the next day, it becomes necessary to manually clear the alarm.

Water Regulating Valve Problem - (Water RegVlv:

Problem) (Self Contained only)

When a unit is equipped with the head pressure control option, the Water Regulating Valve Problem occurs when the greater of the two refrigerant pressure readings drops below the head pressure setpoint by more than the deadband while at least one compressor is operating and the entering water temperature is less than 58°F. These conditions have to be true for more than 5 minutes for the alarm to become active. When the Water Regulating Valve problem occurs, the unit continues to operate but mechanical cooling is disabled.

Mechanical cooling remains disabled until the Water

Regulating Valve problem is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.

Low Pressure - Circuit 1, 2, 3,4,5,6 - (Lo Press 1,2,3,4,5,6:

Problem)

When a unit is equipped with individual cooling circuits, the

Low Pressure Circuit 1 problem occurs when the compressor on circuit #1 has been running longer than the low pressure alarm delay (65 seconds factory default for R22 or 407C application, 5 seconds for 410A) and the low pressure switch

LP1 remains open. The alarm also occurs any time afterward if the low pressure switch opens up while the compressor on the circuit is running. Note: The Low Pressure Circuit 2, 3, 4,

5, & 6 problems occur in the same manner for cooling circuits

2, 3,4,5,6. Compressor #1 (2, 3, 4, 5 or 6) remains disabled for at least one cooling stage time period. After the cooling stage time period expires, the alarm automatically clears and the circuit is re-enabled. If the alarm occurs three times between

2:00 a.m. of one day and 2:00 a.m. of the next, the alarm does not automatically clear the third time but must be manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.

High Pressure - Circuit 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 - (Hi Press

1,2,3,4,5,6: Problem)

This alarm occurs on units equipped with compressorized cooling only. If the high pressure switch opens indicating a high refrigerant pressure situation, the High Pressure Circuit

1, 2, 3,4,5,6 problems occurs.

When the High Pressure Circuit 1, 2, 3,4,5,6 problem occurs, the unit continues to operate but the cooling circuit is disabled. Note: The Circuit remains disabled until the high pressure switch closes and the High Pressure Circuit problem is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.

72 OM 920-4

Alarms

Sump Water Level Problem

Unit state has been cooling for the Sump Water Level Delay time and the Sump Water Level input remains in the open position

Entering Fan Temperature/Leaving Coil Temperature

Sensor Problem (EFT/LCT Snsr: Problem)

This alarm occurs when the Entering Fan Temperature/

Leaving Coil Temperature sensor is present and either shorted or open circuited for longer than the Sensor Alarm Delay

(Default = 30 seconds). When this alarm occurs the unit continues to operate however dehumidification operation is disabled until the sensor becomes reliable. The maximum

DAT limit function associated with gas or electric heat is also disabled until the sensor becomes reliable.

Return Air Temperature Sensor Problem - (RAT Sensor:

Problem)

If the return air temperature sensor (RAT) is present and either shorted or open circuited for longer than the Sensor

Alarm Delay (default is 30 seconds), the Return Air Sensor problem occurs. When the RAT Sensor problem occurs, the unit continues to operate with the following modifications:

• Cooling Reset and Heating Reset revert to none if they are set to Return

• Control temperature source reverts from return to space if a space temperature sensor is present and reliable

When the alarm condition is no longer present, the RAT

Sensor problem automatically clears.

Space Temperature Sensor Problem - (Space Sensor:

Problem)

If the Space Sensor Present setting is set to Yes, a valid Space

Temperature value is not provided via a network signal and the local space sensor is shorted or open circuited longer than the Sensor Alarm Delay (default is 30 seconds), the

Space Temperature Sensor problem occurs. When the Space

Temperature Sensor problem occurs, the unit continues to operate with the following modifications:

• Cooling Reset and Heating Reset revert to none they are set to Space

• Control temperature source reverts from space to return if a return air sensor is present and reliable.

When the alarm condition is no longer present, the Space

Temperature Sensor problem automatically clears.

OAT Temperature Sensor Problem -(OAT Sensor:

Problem)

If the outside air temperature sensor (OAT) is present, a valid

OAT value is not provided via the network and the local OAT sensor is either shorted or open circuited for longer than the Sensor Alarm Delay (default is 30 seconds), the Outside

Air Sensor problem occurs. When the OAT Sensor problem occurs, the unit continues to operate with the following modifications:

• Heating is not locked out due to high OAT

• Cooling is not locked out due to low OAT

• Cooling Reset and Heating Reset revert to none if they are set to OAT

• Economizer is locked out due to high OAT

When the alarm condition is no longer present, the OAT

Sensor problem automatically clears.

Entering Water Temperature Sensor Problem - (EWT

Sensor: Problem)

If the entering water temperature sensor (EWT) is present and either shorted or open circuited for longer than the Sensor

Alarm Delay (default is 30 seconds), the EWT Sensor problem occurs. When the EWT Sensor problem occurs, waterside economizer cooling is disabled. Mechanical cooling is not locked out based on EWT. When the alarm condition is no longer present, the EWT Sensor problem automatically clears.

Mixed Air Temperature Sensor Problem - (MAT Sensor:

Problem)

If the Mixed Air Temperature (MAT) sensor is present and either shorted or open-circuited for longer than the sensor alarm delay (default is 30 seconds), the MAT sensor problem occurs. When the MAT sensor problem occurs, waterside economizer cooling is disabled. When the alarm condition is no longer present, the MAT sensor problem automatically clears.

OM 920-4 73

Alarms

Freeze Problem - (Freeze: Problem)

When a unit is equipped with a waterside economizer, chilled water, hot water, or steam coil, the Freeze problem occurs when the optional freezestat contacts open as a result of detecting an abnormally low water or steam coil temperature while the fans are off.

When the Freeze problem occurs, the controller opens the waterside economizer valve, chilled water and heating valves, and sets a 10-minute timer. If the unit is equipped with a waterside economizer, the pump output is also turned on.

When the 10-minute timer expires, the controller checks the freezestat input again. If the freezestat contacts are closed the pump output is de-energized and the valves close. If the freezestat contacts are still open the pump output remains energized, the valves remain open, and the 10-minute timer resets. This continues while the unit remains off. Whenever the freezestat closes the Freeze problem automatically clears.

This feature protects the coil(s) and allows the system to start normally when an occupied command is received.

Heat Fail Problem - (Heat Fail: Problem)

If an RPS unit is equipped with a Daikin gas furnace and the burner flame safeguard (FSG) control enters the “safety lockout” state after a call for heat, a digital input is provided to EXP B-X4 on the controller. When this digital input is present the Heat Fail problem occurs. When the Heat Fail problem occurs, the unit continues to operate with the heating system disabled by the FSG. Heating remains disabled until the flame safeguard control is manually reset. The heat fail problem clears automatically when the FSG control is reset.

Faults

Airflow Fault - (Airflow: Fault)

If differential pressure switch PC7 fails to detect airflow for longer than the airflow timer (default = 120 seconds) and on

VAV units the current duct static pressure indication is less than half the static pressure setpoint after the unit leaves the

Startup operating state or any time afterward, while the unit is running, the Fan Fail fault occurs. When the Fan Fail fault occurs, the unit is shut down. It remains shut down until the

Fan Fail fault is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal. On units equipped with a discharge fan VFD, the Fan Fail fault only occurs if the Fan Retry condition described above has first occurred twice within the previous twenty-four hour period. The conditions that cause the Fan Retry and the action taken are the same as for the

Fan Fail fault with the difference being that the Fan Retry is automatically reset once the unit is shut off. This allows the unit to attempt to restart up to three times within a twentyfour hour period.

NOTE:

There is no Fan Retry function or three retry function when a unit has a CAV supply fan .

If Modbus communication is lost between the MCB and the supply fan VFD the duct static pressure is not considered in the Fan Fail logic .

Low Discharge Air Temperature - (Lo Disch Temp: Fault)

If the unit is not in the operating state and the discharge air temperature is less than the Low Discharge Temperature

Limit (Default = 40°F) for longer than 30 seconds and the supply fan has been on for longer than the LowDAT temperature alarm delay (Default = 6 minutes), the Low

Discharge Air Temperature fault occurs. When the Low

Discharge Air Temperature fault occurs, the unit is shut down. It remains shut down until the Low Discharge Air

Temperature fault is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.

74 OM 920-4

Alarms

High Discharge Air Temperature - (Hi Disch Temp: Fault)

If the discharge air temperature is greater than the High

Discharge Temperature Limit (Default = 170°F) and the supply fan has been on for longer than the Temperature

Alarm Delay (Default = 30 seconds), the High Discharge

Air Temperature fault occurs. When the High Discharge Air

Temperature fault occurs, the unit is shut down. It remains shut down until the High Discharge Air Temperature fault is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.

High Return Air Temperature - (Hi Return Tmp: Fault)

If the return air temperature is greater than the Return Air

Temperature Limit (Default = 120°F) and the supply fan has been on for longer than the temperature alarm delay (Default

= 30 seconds), the High Return Air Temperature fault occurs.

When the High Return Air Temperature fault occurs, the unit is shut down. It remains shut down until the High Return

Air Temperature fault is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.

Duct High Limit Fault - (Duct Hi Limit: Fault)

If the unit is variable air volume, the contacts of the duct high pressure limit control (DHL) open, and the unit state is not Off or Startup, the Duct High Limit fault occurs. When the Duct High Limit fault occurs, the unit is shut down. The unit remains shut down until the Duct High Limit fault is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.

Discharge Air Sensor Fault -(Disch Tmp: Fault)

If the discharge air temperature sensor (DAT) is open or short circuited for longer than the Sensor Alarm Delay

(Default= 30 seconds), the Discharge Air Sensor fault occurs.

When the Discharge Air Sensor fault occurs, the unit is shut down. It remains shut down until the Discharge Air Sensor fault is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a networksignal.

Control Temperature Fault - (Control Temp: Fault)

If the temperature sensor (ZNT1, RAT, OAT, MAT) selected as the control temperature source is not reliable for longer than the Sensor Alarm Delay (Default= 30 seconds), a Control

Temperature Fault occurs. When the Control Temperature

Fault occurs, the unit is shut down. It remains shut down until the Control Temperature Fault is manually cleared through the unit keypad or via a network signal.

Emergency Stop Fault - (Emerg Stop: Fault)

An Emergency Stop Fault will occur if either of the following conditions is true:

• Emergency Stop Input in the Alarm (Open) condition

• The Net Emrg Ovrd input is set to Off via a network signal or the keypad/display

Freeze Fault - (Freeze: Fault)

When a unit is equipped with a waterside economizer, chilled water, hot water, or steam coil, the Freeze Fault occurs when the optional freezestat contacts open as a result of detecting an abnormally low water or steam coil temperature while the fans are running.

When the Freeze fault occurs, the controller shuts down the fans, opens the chilled water, economizer, and heating valves and set a 10-minute timer. If the unit is equipped with a waterside economizer, the pump output is also turned on.

When the 10-minute timer expires, the controller checks the freezestat input again. If the freezestat contacts are closed the pump output is de-energized and the valves close. If the freezestat contacts are still open the pump output remains energized, the valves remain open, and the 10-minute timer resets. This continues until the fault is manually cleared through the keypad or via a network signal.

NOTE:

Water valves remain open and Pump output remains on for 10 minutes after alarmconditions disappear .

OM 920-4 75

Operator’s Guide

Operator’s Guide

The following “Operator’s Guide” sections provide information regarding the day-to-day operation of the

MicroTech III Unit Controller. Topics covered are such common tasks as scheduling, displaying and clearing alarms, and setting the controller for manual operation.

Figure 11: State Diagram

The transition from any operating state to another is graphically represented in this figure. With a “start up” command from an Off State the unit will always go into the

“Start Up” state of operation for 3 minutes (adjustable). Next, it will transition into the “Recirculation” state of operation for another 3 minutes (adjustable) before finally going into the Fan Only state of operation. Then, based on sensor inputs it will go into any of the 4 remaining states of operation - heating, cooling, economizer, or minimum discharge air heating.

Determining Unit State

The unit will operate in one of eight operating states. The current state will be displayed by the Unit State parameter in the system summary menu.

In the off state, all heating, cooling, and fans are off. The alarm output indicates the type of alarm, if any, that is active.

In the start up state, the Fan Operation output is turned on to allow shut off dampers to be opened before any the supply fan is turned on. The outdoor air dampers remain closed.

The supply fan is turned on when the unit enters the

Recirculation state. The supply fan in VAV units is controlled as described in the Supply Fan Capacity Control section, page

110. The outdoor dampers remain closed.

A separate morning warm-up state is not provided, but an edited ZeroOATime is used to keep the outside air damper closed when the unit first starts. The Minimum OA Position is set to zero as long as the as the fan has been on for less than the ZeroOATime.

DAT Control units have a MWU setpoint available.

The Minimum OA Position is set to zero as long as the as the fan has been on for less than the ZeroOATime. This allows the Return Air type units to cool down the space with mechanical cooling or to warm up the space with the dampers closed. If the ZeroOATime is set correctly, the OA dampers will be open only during occupied periods. When

Optimum Start is used Zero OA Time is set equal to the time to occupancy when the unit starts so that the OA dampers will open at occupancy time.

Neither heating nor cooling is provided when the unit is in the fan only state, with the exception of when dehumidification is active. The outdoor dampers are opened to the minimum position in this state when the fan on time exceeds the Zero

OA Time.

In the other four states, temperature is controlled as describe in the appropriate sections of this document. These states are Minimum DAT, Heating, Economizer, and Cooling. The outdoor dampers are opened to at least the minimum position in these states when the fan on time exceeds the Zero OA

Time.

Off Operating State

In the Off operating state the fans are off, the outside air dampers are closed and any VFD’s are driven to 0%. Cooling and heating are disabled. The unit is in the off state when it is not enabled, or when it is in the unoccupied mode with no call for unoccupied operation. refer to “Determining Unit Status” on page 70 for reasons the unit can be disabled.

Start Up Operating State

When a unit is commanded to start it will always enter the

Startup operating state from the Off operating state. The unit remains in the Startup operating state for an adjustable time period (default 180 seconds) before entering the Recirculating operating state.

During the Start up operating state the fans remain off, the outdoor air dampers are driven closed, and VFD’s remain at

0%. Cooling and heating are disabled, except for 100% OA heating start sequences.

76 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Recirculating Operating State

Units with return air always enter the Recirculating operating state after the completion of the Startup operating state. In the Recirculating operating state fans are started and operate while the outdoor air dampers remain closed.

This allows temperature conditions throughout the unit and space to equalize before temperature control begins.

Cooling and heating remain disabled. The unit remains in the

Recirculating operating state until the Recirculate State Timer

(default 180 seconds) expires.

NOTE:

100% outdoor air units do not transition through the

Recirculating operating state .

Fan Only

The unit enters the Fan Only operating state after the recirculation timer expires. Units configured for 100% outside air operation will transition directly from the Start up operating state into the Fan Only operating state. Once entering the Fan Only state of operation the unit will then, based on sensor inputs transition into any of the 4 remaining states of operation - heating, cooling, economizer, or minimum discharge air heating.

Min DAT

If heating is enabled and there is no heating load (normally

FanOnly operating state), the controller activates the units heating equipment as required to prevent the discharge air temperature from becoming too cool if the Min DAT

Control Flag is set to yes via the Heating menu (Commission

Unit/Heating/MinDAT Ctrl). The unit enters the Min DAT operating state during occupied operation when neither cooling nor heating is required based on the heat/cool changeover function but the discharge temperature falls below a minimum discharge temperature limit. If the discharge air temperature falls below the this minimum discharge temperature limit by more than half the discharge heating deadband, the unit operating state changes from Fan Only to

Min DAT. The unit transitions out of the Min DAT operating state once the discharge air temperature is above minimum discharge temperature limit and the heating capacity has been at its minimum position for the duration of the heating stage timer.

NOTE:

On VAV or CAV discharge control units, the DAT cooling setpoint parameter in the Cooling menu acts as the minimum discharge temperature limit . On CAV zone control units the Min DAT Limit parameter in the Heating menu acts as the minimum discharge temperature limit .

Heating

Operator’s Guide

The unit enters the Heating operating state when the control temperature falls below the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating

Setpoint by more than ½ the occupied or unoccupied heating deadband. During the Heating operating state, the outdoor air dampers are either 100% open if the unit is a 100% outdoor air unit or controlled to the minimum outside air position.

Cooling is disabled.

Economizer

If the unit is equipped with a 0-100% modulating economizer

(waterside or airside) and the conditions are suitable for free cooling, the unit attempts to satisfy the cooling load by using either outdoor air or the waterside economizer before using mechanical cooling.

If the unit is configured for Zone Temperature Control the transition to economizer operation will occur if all the following are true:

• The control temperature rises above the occupied or unoccupied cooling setpoint by more that ½ the occupied or unoccupied cooling high deadband

• The discharge air temperature is greater than the Min

DAT limit by more than ½ the DAT

• heating deadband. This will prevent more cold air from being brought in when the DAT is already cold

• The economizer operation is not disabled

• If the unit is configured for Discharge Air Temperature

Control the transition to Mechanical cooling will occur if all the following are true:

• The control temperature rises above the occupied or unoccupied cooling setpoint by more that ½ the occupied or unoccupied cooling deadband

• The discharge air temperature is greater than the DAT cooling setpoint

OM 920-4 77

Operator’s Guide

Mechanical Cooling

The unit enters the mechanical cooling operating state when cooling is required and the economizer is disabled, not present, or already fully open.

If the unit is configured for Zone Temperature Control the transition to Mechanical cooling will occur if all the following are true:

• The control temperature rises above the occupied or unoccupied cooling setpoint by more that ½ the occupied or unoccupied cooling deadband

• The discharge air temperature is greater than the Min

DAT limit by more than ½ the DAT heating deadband.

This will prevent more cold air from being brought in when the DAT is already cold

• The economizer operation is disabled or not present

• Mechanical cooling is enabled

• If the unit is configured for Discharge Air Temperature

Control the transition to Mechanical cooling will occur if all the following are true:

• The control temperature rises above the occupied or unoccupied cooling setpoint by more that ½ the occupied or unoccupied cooling deadband

• The discharge air temperature is greater than the DAT cooling setpoint by more than ½ the DAT cooling deadband

• Post heat operation is complete

• Economizer operation is disabled

• Mechanical cooling is enabled

Determining Unit Status

Unit Status is a status only item which indicates whether or not the unit is enabled and if not why.

Enabled

Unit operation has not been disabled for any of the following reasons.

Off Manual

The unit operating state is off and the unit status is OffMan when the control mode is set to off via the keypad. The control mode can only be changed via the System menu on the keypad/display.

OffManCtrl

The unit operating state is off and the unit status is

OffManCtl when the controller is set to manual control via the Manual Control menu.

Off Network

The unit operating state is off and the unit status is Off Net when the control mode is set to Auto via the System menu and the network Net App Mode is set to off.

Off Alarm

The unit operating state is off and the unit status is OffAlm when an active alarm of the “fault” type has the unit shutdown.

Off Fan Retry

The unit operating state is off and the unit status is OffFnRty when The fan retry conditions below indicate that the unit should be shutdown and restarted after airflow is lost.

• The supply fan is controlled by a VFD

• The airflow switch (PC7) is open AND the duct static pressure is less than ½ the duct static pressure setpoint

• There are no active faults that would shut down the unit

Determining Control Mode

The unit cooling and heating can be set up for automatic heat/ cool, cool only, heat only, fan only, or network cool/heat operation by setting the Control Mode. The unit can also be manually disabled via the Control Mode. The following are descriptions of the six available Control Mode selections.

Off

When the Control Mode is set to “Off,” the Unit Status is

“Off Man” and the unit is completely disabled.

Heat Only

When the Control Mode is set to “Heat Only,” heating operation is allowed to operate to maintain the heating set points. Cooling operation is disabled (Cooing Status is “Off

Man”).

Cool Only

When the Control Mode is set to “Cool Only,” cooling operation is allowed to operate to maintain the cooling set points. Heating operation is disabled (Heating Status is “Off

Man”).

Fan Only

When the Control Mode is set to “Fan Only,” the fans are allowed to operate but cooling and heating operation is disabled (Cooling Status and Heating Status are “Off Man”).

Heat Cool

When the Control Mode is set to “Heat/Cool,” both cooling and heating operation are allowed to operate as required to maintain the cooling and heating set points.

Auto

When the Control Mode is set to “Auto,” the heat/cool, cool only, heat only, and fan only decision is determined by the network application mode parameter, which is set via a network signal as described below. The NetApp Mode parameter has no effect on unit operation unless the Control

Mode is set to “Auto.”

78 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Determining Cooling Status

Clg Status is a status item which indicates whether or not mechanical cooling is currently allowed. If cooling is disabled, the reason is indicated.

The following are descriptions of cooling status states.

Enabled

Mechanical cooling is enabled if all the following are true:

• Cooling capability is provided

• Control mode is not set via the keypad to fan only or heat only

• Control mode is set via the keypad to auto and not disabled via a network command

• The outdoor air temperature (OAT) on air cooled units or the entering water temperature (EWT) on water cooled units is high enough for operation

• Compressor operation is not disabled by an alarm condition

None

Cooling capability is not provided.

Off Ambient

The outdoor air temperature (OAT) on air cooled units or the entering water temperature (EWT) on water cooled units is too low for operation.

The OAT becomes too low for operation when it drops below the OAT cooling lockout setting. OAT becomes high enough for operation when it rises above the OAT cooling lockout setting by more than 2°F (adjustable - OAT Diff). The EWT becomes too low for operation when it drops below the minimum EWT set point. EWT becomes high enough for operation when it rises above the minimum EWT set point by more than 2°F (adjustable - Econo Diff).

NOTE:

The OAT cooling lockout cannot be set lower than

40°F when the unit is equipped with an evaporative condenser and should not be set lower than 50°F unless the unit is equipped with low ambient capability .

Off Alarm

Compressor operation is disabled by an alarm condition. This happens when either all circuits are disabled by either a high or low pressure alarm, when applicable the water flow switch alarm is active, when applicable sump pump fail alarm is active or applicable water regulating valve alarm is active.

Off Network

Control mode is set via the keypad to auto and cooling is disabled via a network command.

Off Manual

Control mode is set to Fan Only or Heat Only via the keypad display.

Determining Heat Status

Htg Status is a status item which indicates whether or not heating is currently allowed. If heating is disabled, the reason is indicated.

The following are descriptions of heating status states:

Enabled

Heating is enabled if all the following are true:

• Heating capability is provided

• Control mode is not set via the keypad to fan only or cool only

• Control mode is set via the keypad to auto and not disabled via a network command

• The outdoor air temperature (OAT) is low enough for operation

None

Heating capability is not provided.

Off Ambient

The OAT is too high for operation. The OAT becomes too high for operation when the OAT rises above the OAT heating lockout set point. OAT becomes low enough for operation when the OAT drops below the OAT heating lockout set point by more than the Heating Lockout Differential.

Off Network

Control mode is set via the keypad to auto and the unit is disabled via a network command.

Off Manual

Control mode is set to Fan Only or Cool Only via the keypad.

OM 920-4 79

Operator’s Guide

Determining Economizer Status

Econo Status is a status item which indicates whether or not economizer operation is currently allowed. If economizer operation is disabled, the reason is indicated.

The following are descriptions of economizer status states.

Economizer is enabled if all the following are true:

• Economizer capability is provided

• Dehumidification operation is not enabled

• The unit is configured for waterside economizer and the EWT is below the mixed air temperature minus the

EWT differential or the unit is configured for airside economizer, the enthalpy switch input indicates low enthalpy, and the outdoor air temperature (OAT) is low enough for operation

None

Economizer capability is not provided.

Off Ambient

Economizer status is Off Ambient if any of the following conditions exist:

• The unit is configured for waterside economizer and the

Entering Water Temperature (EWT) exceeds the mixed air temperature minus the EWT differential set point.

• The unit is configured for airside economizer and the outdoor air temperature (OAT) is too high for operation.

• Unit is configured for waterside economizer and the

EWT sensor is unreliable.

• Unit is configured for airside economizer and the outdoor air temperature (OAT) sensor is unreliable.

Off Network

Economizer operation is disabled via a network command.

Off Dehumidification

Economizer operation is disabled if dehumidification operation is enabled.

Determining Cooling Capacity

Clg Capacity is a status item which indicates the percentage of the unit maximum cooling capacity currently operating.

When the unit is equipped with chilled water cooling,

0-100% is displayed as the cooling valve actuator strokes from the closed to open position. When the unit is equipped with compressorized cooling, the percentage value changes incrementally based on the number of operating cooling stages.

Determining Heating Capacity

Htg Capacity is a status item which indicates the percentage of the unit maximum heating capacity currently operating.

When the unit is equipped with modulating heat, 0-100% is displayed as the heating valve actuator strokes from the closed to open position. When the unit is equipped with staged heat, the percentage value changes incrementally based on the number of operating heating stages.

Determining Supply Air Fan Capacity

SAF Speed is a status only item which indicates the supply air fan capacity. 0-100% of VFD maximum speed is indicated if the unit is equipped with a supply air fan VFD. 100% is indicated if the supply fan is constant volume and is running.

Determining RF/EF Capacity

RF/EF capacity is a status only item which indicates the current return or exhaust fan capacity. 0-100% of VFD maximum speed is indicated if the unit is equipped with a modulating return or exhaust fan VFD. 100% is indicated if the return/exhaust fan is constant volume and is running.

When the unit is equipped with staged exhaust fans, the percentage value changes incrementally based on the number of operating exhaust fan stages.

Determining Outside Air Damper Position

OAD/Econo Cap is a status only item which indicates the current outdoor air damper or economizer valve position.

Determining Emergency Mode

Emergency Mode is an adjustable item which is normally used by a network system to shutdown the unit in an emergency situation.

80 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Determining Application Mode

The unit heating and cooling can be set up for automatic heat/cool, heat only, cool only or fan only operation based on a network signal by setting the Control Mode parameter to “Auto.” With the Control Mode parameters set to “Auto,” the heat/cool, cool only, heat only, and fan only decision is determined by the Net App Mode. The Net App Mode is set by a network signal. The following sections describe the five available Net App Mode selections.

NOTE:

The Net App Mode has no effect on the unit operation unless the Control Mode parameter is set to “Auto .”

Off

When the Net App Mode is set to “Off,” the Unit Status is

“Off Net” and the unit is completely disabled, including unoccupied heating (night set back) and unoccupied or unoccupied cooling (night set up) operation.

Heat Only

When the Net App Mode is set to “Heat Only,” heating operation is allowed to operate as required to maintain the heating set points. Cooling operation is disabled (Cooling

Status is “Off Net”).

Cool Only

When the Net App Mode is set to “Cool Only,” cooling operation is allowed to operate as required to maintain the cooling set points. Heating operation is disabled (Heating

Status is “Off Net”).

Fan Only

When the Net App Mode is set to “Fan Only,” the fans are allowed to operate but cooling and heating operation is disabled (Cooling Status and Heating Status are “Off Net”).

Auto

When the Net App Mode is set to “Auto” heating and cooling operation are allowed to operate as required to maintain the heating and cooling set points.

Determining Occupancy Status

Occupancy is a status item which indicates whether the unit is in an occupied, unoccupied or tenant override mode of operation.

The following are descriptions of the various “Occupancy” states.

Occ

The Occupancy parameter indicates “Occ” when the unit is in the occupied mode. In this mode, the unit starts and runs continuously, cooling and heating as required to maintain the occupied temperature set points. The unit is in the occupied mode if any of the following conditions are true:

• The Occ Mode entry on the keypad is set to occupied

• The Occ Mode entry on the keypad is set to Auto, and a manual network occupancy command is sent to the controller

• The Occ Mode entry on the keypad is set to Auto, a manual network occupancy command is set to Auto, and any of the following is true:

• The External Start/Stop switch is closed

• A network schedule signal is set to Occupied or Standby

• The internal schedule function is in the Occupied condition

Unocc

The Occupancy parameter indicates “Unocc” when the unit is in the unoccupied mode. In this mode, the unit remains off unless unoccupied operation becomes active. When unoccupied operation is active the unit operates normally except that Minimum OA Position is set to zero. See

Unoccupied Operation below for information regarding when unoccupied operation is activated.

TntOvrd

The Occupancy parameter indicates “TntOvrd” when the unit is in the tenant override mode. In this mode, the unit starts and runs continuously, cooling and heating as required to maintain the occupied temperature.

OM 920-4 81

Operator’s Guide

Tenant override operation is initiated when the Tenant

Override Timer is greater than zero. The Tenant Override

Timer is set equal to the Local Tenant Override Time (Timer

Settings menu) if the unit is enabled and any of the following is true:

• The Space Temperature sensor is present and its tenant override button is pressed for less than 10 seconds.

Nothing happens if the button is pushed for more than

10 seconds but less than the time required to initiate a shorted sensor alarm (30 seconds). Subsequent presses on the button resets the Tenant Override Timer to the

Local Tenant Override Time, i.e. the max time

• The Occ Mode entry on the keypad is set to Tenant

Override. After the Tenant Override Timer is set, the

Occ Mode entry on the keypad reverts to auto after a 2 second time delay

• The Occ Mode entry on the keypad is set to Auto or

Unocc, and a manual network occupancy command is set to Bypass. After the Tenant Override Timer is set, the network occupancy command reverts to Auto

Subsequent presses on the button, setting of the keypad occupancy entry to Tenant Override again, or setting of the network occupancy command to Bypass again resets the Tenant Override Timer to the Local Tenant Override

Time.

The TOTime entry on the keypad can also be manually set to a non-zero value. In this case the value begins timing down from the edited value.

Tenant Override Operation may be terminated by manually setting the Tenant Override parameter on the keypad to zero or by disabling the unit.

Determining Occupancy Mode

Occ Mode is an adjustable item which sets the unit for manual occupied, unoccupied, tenant override or automatic operation.

Occ

When Occ Mode is set to “Occ,” the unit is manually placed in the occupied mode of operation.

Unocc

When Occ Mode is set to “Unocc,” the unit is manually placed in the unoccupied mode of operation.

TntOvrd

When Occ Mode is set to “TntOvrd,” the unit is manually placed in the tenant override mode of operation.

NOTE:

Once tenant override operation is activated the parameter automatically reverts back to “Auto .”

Auto

When Occ Mode is set to “Auto” the automatically changes between occupied, unoccupied and tenant override operation.

Determining Occupancy Source

When the Occupancy parameter indicates Occ, the occupancy source is set to one of the following values to indicate the function responsible for placing the unit into the occupied mode of operation.

None

The Occ Src= parameter indicates “None” when the

Occupancy= parameter indicates “Unocc” or “Tnt Ovrd.”

NetSchedule

The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Net Schd” when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to a network schedule indicating an occupied period.

IntSchedule

The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Int Sched” when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to the unit internal schedule.

OneEventSchedule

The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Int

Sched” when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to the unit one event schedule.

RemoteSwitch

The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Remote

Sw” when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to a field supplied external time clock or a tenant override switch signal in the form of a set of dry contacts is closed across terminals 101 and102 on the unit field terminal block TB2.

OccManCmd

The Occ Src= parameter indicates

“OccManCmd” when OccMode is set to Auto and the network manual occupancy command is set to Occupied.

OccMode

The Occ Src= parameter indicates “Occ Mode” when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to the

Occupancy Mode being manually set to “Occ.”

TStatTO

The Occ Src = parameter indicates “TStatTO” when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “TntOvrd” due to the tenant override button on the zone thermostat being pushed.

The button must be held for at least 1 second but not more than 10 seconds.

ManTO

The TntOvrd Src = parameter indicates “ManTO” when the Occupancy= parameter indicates “Occ” due to the being manually set via the keypad/display. When the Tenant

Override Timer is set to a non-zero value, the unit starts and runs in the tenant override mode regardless of any scheduling features. The unit stops when the timer expires. The Tenant

Override Timer can be set from 0-300 minutes.

82 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Unoccupied Operation

During unoccupied operation the unit operates normally except that Min OA Pos is set to zero so that the damper is closed to the outdoor air.

Unoccupied Dehumidification

Dehumidification may be initiated in the unoccupied mode only if Dehumidification Control is set to Always instead of Occupied on the keypad. When this is the case and the humidity goes high the unit transitions in the normal manner through Start up and Recirc to Fan Only and then into the Dehumidification Mode. In this case, the UnoccSrc= parameter indicates “Unocc Dehum”.

Unoccupied Cooling (Night Setup)

Unoccupied operation is initiated if the space sensor is reliable, the space temperature is greater than the Unoccupied

Cooling Setpoint, and the Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint is set lower than its maximum setting. In this case, the unoccupied source indicates “UnoccClg”.

Unoccupied Heating (Night Setback)

Unoccupied operation is initiated if the space sensor is reliable, the space temperature is less than the Unoccupied

Heating Setpoint, and the Unoccupied Heating Setpoint is set higher than its minimum setting. In this case, the Unoccupied

Source indicates “UnoccHtg”

Internal Optimal Start

Unoccupied operation is enabled due to an internal optimal start schedule being activated. In this case, the Unoocupied

Source indicates “IntOptStrt”.

Network Optimal Start

Unoccupied operation is enabled due to a network optimal start schedule being activated. In this case, the Unoccupied

Source indicates “NetOpStrt”.

None

The Unoccupied Source is set to “None” when Unoccupied operation is inactive.

Scheduling

The Air Handling unit can be scheduled for operation by using the following three methods:

• Unit internal time scheduling functions

• External time clock function

• Network time scheduling function

Provided the unit is not locally or remotely disabled, the unit operates when any of these scheduling functions is calling for occupied operation. Conversely, the unit enters the unoccupied mode when all of these scheduling functions are calling for unoccupied operation. Therefore, any unused scheduling functions should be set for continuous unoccupied operation.

The next four sections: “Setting Controller Date and Time,”

“Internal Daily Scheduling,” “Holiday Scheduling,” and “One

Event Scheduling” describe functions related to the internal unit scheduling functions. These are followed by a section describing the optimal start function which can be use with internal scheduling and network scheduling. This is followed by two sections that describe the external time scheduling and network time scheduling functions.

Setting Controller Date and Time

The controller uses the date and time to execute its internal scheduling functions. The current time and date will not be lost if the unit is turned off for up to forty-eight hours. The clock and date are settable from the keypad. The time of day can be set by entering the hour (00-23), minute (00-59), and second (00-59) into three fields of the Current Time. Note that MicroTech III uses “military” time. The current date can be set by entering the date (00-31), month (01- 12) and year

(1999-2155) into the three fields of the Current Date.

Internal Daily Schedule

An internal Daily Schedule provides one start time and one stop time for each of the seven days of the week and for holidays. When the Occ Mode= parameter is set to “Auto/

Net”, and the unit is not disabled for other reasons, it starts and stops according to the controller internal schedule.

Holiday Scheduling

The operator may select the days when start and stop times for holidays are used by selecting a start date and an end date for up to ten periods during the year by using the holiday scheduling feature. Whenever a holiday period occurs, the controller uses the Holiday Schedule start and stop time for the period. For example, assume that Christmas Eve occurs on a Thursday. The building is shut down on both

Christmas Eve and Christmas Day, but operates normally on the weekend. This holiday period would be scheduled by setting the Holiday Schedule to the default “no schedule” values “HH:MM- HH:MM” and setting the Holiday Period to

“12/24/08 - 12/25/08.”

OM 920-4 83

Operator’s Guide

One Event Scheduling

A One-Event Schedule is provided so that one operating period can be scheduled without affecting the regular internal schedule. A start date/time and an end date/time can be set.

The unit can be scheduled to operate during a specified period by using this feature. During the specified period defined by the One Event Beginning Date/Time and One

Event Ending Date/Time parameters the unit starts up and runs continuously regardless of any other time scheduling functions. For example, assume that a space served by the unit is occupied for a special event on March 12, 2008 from

5:00 p.m. to 10:00 p.m. when the normal time scheduling has the unit shut off after 4:00 p.m. on that date. This event can be accounted for by setting the One Event Beginning Date/Time to “3/12/08 @ 17:00:00” and the One Event Ending Date/Time to “3/12/08 @ 22:00:00.”

Optimal Start

When Optimal Start is active (Optimal Start = Yes), an early start time is determined before each scheduled start. The schedule must be based on an internal schedule or a signal via a connected network that indicates time to occupancy.

The controller uses start history, outdoor air temperature and space temperature to determine when the unit should start.

The unit may start up to four hours before the scheduled occupancy time. Optimal start based on heating operates when the space temperature is below the Occupied or

Unoccupied Heating Spt by ½ the Zone Htg Deadband.

Optimal start based on cooling operates when the space temperature is above the Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling

Spt by ½ the Cooling Deadband. If space temperature is between the above two points, the unit starts at the occupancy time.

External Time Scheduling

An external time clock can be used to schedule unit operation. This is accomplished by a field supplied external time clock signal in the form of a set of dry contacts wired across terminals 101 and 102 on the unit field terminal block

TB2. In this case, all internal daily schedules should be set to

“HH:MM-HH:MM” (default setting).

Temperature Control Configurations

Temperature control is based on a Control Type that may be set to Zone, DAT, or Single Zone VAV.

When the Control Type is set to Zone temperature control, heating, compressors, and the economizer are controlled to maintain the temperature of the zone at a desired setpoint.

This configuration is used on units equipped with constant volume supply fans. Compressors and heating stages are staged to maintain space or return temperature. The number of compressors is decreased when it is too cold and increased when it is too hot subject to stage timers. The number of heat stages is decreased when it is too hot and increased when it is too cold subject to stage timers.

When the Control Type is set to DAT, heating, compressors, and the economizer are controlled to maintain the discharge air temperature at a desired setpoint. This configuration is typically used on units equipped with variable air volume supply fans.

When the Control Type is set to (single zone VAV), heating, compressors and the economizer are controlled to maintain the discharge air temperature at the desired setpoint while the variable volume supply fan is modulated to maintain the temperature of the zone at the desired heating and cooling setpoints. In heating mode the supply fan capacity is increased as the zone temperature falls and decreased as the zone temperature rises.

Heat/Cool Changeover

In general, a unit configured for discharge air temperature control either operates to deliver the cooling discharge temperature set point using economizer and/or mechanical cooling or the heating discharge air temperature set point using the heating equipment. Cooling and heating never operate simultaneously. A unit configured for zone (or space comfort) control either operates to maintain the Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling Set Point using economizer and/or mechanical cooling or the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating

Set Point using the heating equipment.

The occupied or unoccupied cooling/occupied or unoccupied heating setpoints can be set via the keypad/display or based on a signal from an optional space temperature sensor with set point adjustment capability. The following sections describe the unit heat/ cool changeover function.

84 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Illustrative Heat/Cool Changeover Sequence

The following is an illustration of the heat/cool changeover function.

When the control temperature is below the occupied or unoccupied heating setpoint by more than ½ the deadband

(point A), heating operation is enabled. Heating operation then remains enabled until the control temperature begins to rise and rises above the occupied or unoccupied heating setpoint by more than ½ the deadband (point B), at which point heating operation is disabled and the unit enters the fan only (or Min DAT) operating state. If the control temperature rises above the occupied or unoccupied cooling setpoint by more than ½ the deadband (point C) cooling operation is enabled. Cooling operation remains enabled until the control temperature begins to fall below the occupied or unoccupied cooling setpoint by more than ½ the deadband (point D), at which point the unit returns or fan only (or Min DAT) operating state.

Figure 12: Heat/Cool Changeover

Control Temperature

The “Control Temperature” is defined as the unit temperature input used to make the heat/cool changeover decision. This determines whether or not cooling or heating is enabled.

The user may select Space Temperature, Return Temperature,

Outdoor Air Temperature or None for DAT units. Normally either the Return or Space Temperature is selected as the control temperature. Outdoor Air Temperature may be used as the control temperature for DAT units, but not for Zone

Control units.

When the Control Temperature Source is set to None, the unit no longer “changes over” between heating and cooling in the normal manner. Instead it acts as if it is always in the

“cooling” mode of operation controlling to the discharge air cooling set point. In this case the unit operating state will vary between Cooling, Fan Only and Min DAT (heating) in order to maintain the discharge air cooling set point. The unit will only enter the Heating operating state and control to the discharge heating set point for morning warm up purposes.

The Control Temperature Source automatically reverts from

Return to Space if both of the following are true:

• The Return Air Sensor is not present and reliable

• A network or local Space Sensor is present and reliable

The Control Temperature Source automatically reverts from

Space to Return if both of the following are true:

• The space sensor is not reliable (a valid space temperature value is not provided via the network and the space temperature sensor is either in alarm or not present)

• The return air sensor is reliable (present and not in alarm)

The Control Temperature Source automatically reverts from either Outdoor Air or Mixed Air to Return if the Control

Type is Zone (Not DAT). If the return air temperature is not reliable, the control temperature may then revert to space as described above.

The Control Temperature Source automatically reverts from

Mixed Air to Outdoor Air if Unit Type is not SCU.

A Control Temperature Fault that shuts down the unit is initiated if any of the following is true.

• The return air sensor is not present and reliable and

Return Air is selected as the control temperature and a space sensor is not available.

• A network or local space sensor is not present and reliable and Space is selected as the control temperature and a return temperature sensor is not available.

• The OAT Sensor is not present and reliable and Outdoor

Air is selected as the control temperature

• The mixed air temperature sensor is not present or reliable and Mixed Air is selected as the control temperature

Occupied Temperature Set Points

When the Use Tstat set point parameter is set to No, the

Occupied Cooling Set Point and the Occupied Heating

Set Point may be set through the keypad or via a network signal. In this case these set points are changed whenever the network or keypad value changes. When the Use Tstat set point parameter is set to Yes these set points can only be adjusted through the zone thermostat. Heating and cooling set points must not overlap. The Occupied Heating Set Point must be equal to or less than the Occupied Cooling Set Point.

If a conflict occurs from values entered via the keypad or network, the Occupied Heating Set Point is automatically adjusted down to eliminate the conflict. When the Occupied

Cooling Set point is changed by more than 0.5 degrees through the wall mounted sensor, the Occupied Heating

Set Point is raised or lowered the same amount so that the difference between the Cooling and Heating set points does not change.

OM 920-4 85

Operator’s Guide

OA/EWT Lockout

Heating is disabled whenever the outdoor air temperature is greater than the Outdoor Air Ambient Heating Lockout Set

Point. When the outdoor air temperature drops below the

Outdoor Air Ambient Heating Lockout Set Point by more than the Heating Lockout Differential, heating operation is re-enabled. Cooling is disabled if outdoor air temperature or entering water temperature is too low for operation. The outdoor air temperature becomes too low for operation when it drops below the Outdoor Air Ambient Cooling Lockout

Set Point. Outdoor air temperature becomes high enough for operation when it rises above the Outdoor Air Ambient

Cooling Lockout Set Point by more than the Cooling Lockout

Differential. The entering water temperature becomes too low for operation when it drops below the Minimum Entering

Water Temperature Setpoint. Entering water temperature becomes high enough for operation when it rises above the

Minimum Entering Water Temperature Setpoint by more the

Cooling Lockout Differential.

Tenant Override

The tenant-override button provided with the optional zone temperature sensor packages is used to override unoccupied operation for a pre programmed time period. This time period is set with the Tenant Override Time Increment. This value can be adjusted from 0 to 300 minutes (default is 120 minutes). When an occupant presses and releases the tenant override button on the zone temperature sensor (ZNT1), the

Tenant Override Timer is set equal to the Tenant Override

Time Increment. (The button must be held for at least 1 second but not more than 10 seconds.) The unit then starts and runs in the tenant override mode which is the same as occupied mode except that it is temporary. The Tenant

Override Timer begins timing out and the unit runs until the timer expires. If the tenant override button is pressed again while the unit is operating in tenant override mode, the

Tenant Override Timer is reset to the Tenant Override Time

Increment and the unit continues to operate. For example, assume that the Tenant Override Time Increment is 120 minutes. One press of the override button provides at least

120 minutes of unit operation. If the button is pressed again

60 minutes later, the Tenant Override Timer is reset to 120 minutes, and a total of 180 minutes of uninterrupted operation results.

NOTE:

The same operation occurs if, instead of pressing the override button on a zone temperature sensor, the

Occupancy Mode is set to “Tnt Ovrd .” Once set to “Tnt

Ovrd”, the Occupancy Mode automatically reverts to the “Auto” setting once the Tnt Ovrd Timer is set to the Tnt Ovrd Time Increment . The same operation will also occur if the network occupancy manual command it set to bypass

Zero OA Time (Morning Warm-up)

A separate Morning Warm-up operating state is not provided, but an editable ZeroOATime is used to keep the Outside Air damper closed when the unit first starts. The Minimum OA

Position is set to zero as long as the as the fan has been on for less than the ZeroOATime. This allows the Return Air type units to cool down the space with mechanical cooling or to warm up the space with the dampers closed. If the

ZeroOATime is set correctly, the OA dampers will be open only during occupied periods. When Optimum Start is used

ZeroOATime is set equal to the time to occupancy when the unit starts so that the OA dampers will open at occupancy time.

Post Heat Operation

After leaving the Recirc or Heating operating state and entering either the Fan Only or Min DAT operating state, the unit performs “post heat” operation if the Post Heat Timer is set to a non zero value. “Post heat” operation occurs within the Fan Only or MinDAT operating state. During “post heat” operation, the VAV Box Output remains open (heat) while the discharge fan capacity is forced to a minimum value (default

33% speed for VFD). By forcing the discharge fan capacity to a minimum value before the VAV Box Output closes

(cool), “post heat” operation is designed to prevent duct overpressurization by decreasing the duct pressure before the VAV boxes can close.

“Post heat” operation remains active until either the discharge fan capacity reaches the minimum value or until the Post

Heat Timer expires, whichever occurs first. When “post heat” operation ends, normal duct static pressure or position control resumes.

NOTE:

During “post heat” operation and for 120 seconds afterward, the proof of airflow input is ignored. This is to prevent nuisance Fan Fail fault alarms that may occur if the airflow switch opens during or following

“post heat” operation . The unit cannot leave the Fan

Only or Min DAT operating state while the airflow switch input is being ignored . The VAV output is only available to the field via network communications.

86 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Dehumidification

In the dehumidification mode, mechanical cooling is used to cool air low enough to wring moisture out of it. Hot Gas

Reheat or the standard unit heating equipment (Gas, SCR

Electric or Steam/Hot water) is used to raise the temperature of this cooled air to a desirable value.

Dehumidification Initiation

An analog sensor is mounted in the return duct, the space, or outdoor to sense relative humidity. The location is selected by setting the Sensor Location value on the keypad to Return,

Space, or OAT.

NOTE:

This setting is used to dictate which temperature sensor is used to calculate the dewpoint . OAT can only be selected for units with DAT control .

The relative humidity and a calculated dewpoint temperature are both displayed on the keypad . The calculated dewpoint temperature is based on the relative humidity and Return, Space, or OAT value depending on the location of the humidity sensor .

Humidity control is disabled if cooling is disabled for any reason. Dehumidification operation is initiated when Humidity Control is set to either relative humidity or dewpoint and that value rises above the appropriate setpoint by more than half its deadband .

Dehumidification Termination

Dehumidification is terminated if the selected variable,

Relative Humidity or Dew Point, drops below the appropriate humidity setpoint by more than half its deadband.

Dehumidification is also terminated if cooling is disabled for any reason. Other ways that dehumidification may be terminated are if Dehum Method is set to “None” on the keypad, or if the unit goes to Off Net, Off Sw, Off Alm, or

Off Man Ctrl.

When Dehumidification is terminated, all mechanical cooling is turned off except when the unit is in the Cooling state. Modulated cooling reverts to normal control when dehumidification is terminated in the Cooling state. For units with compressors, the number of cooling stages is reduced by one and control reverts to normal control when dehumidification is terminated in the Cooling state. Another compressor stage change could then occur after one Cooling

Stage Time has elapsed

Dehumidification Mechanical Cooling Control

During dehumidification, control of mechanical cooling is based on the following two editable values of the Leaving

Coil Temperature setpoint.

• Mx Lvg Coil T (Default = 52°F)

• Mn Lvg Coil T (Default = 45°F)

For compressorized units, the number of compressor stages increases when all of the following are true:

• The time since the last stage change exceeds the Clg

Stage Time

• Leaving Coil Temperature is greater than the Mx Lvg

Coil T

• The current cooling stage is less than the available number of stages

During the dehumidification mode, the number of compressor stages decreases when all of the following are true:

• The time since the last stage change exceeds the Clg

Stage Time

• Leaving Coil Temperature is less than Mn Lvg Coil T

Spt

• The current cooling stage is greater than zero

Units with modulated cooling are controlled by a PI Loop to maintain the temperature leaving the coil at the Mn Lvg

Coil T. The normal DAT Cooling Deadband and PI Loop parameters are used in this PI Loop.

MPS HGBP Valve

When the Unit Type is MPS and the unit is equipped with modulating hot gas reheat control an HGBP valve output

(MCB-DO6) is controlled to make sure hot gas is not flowing through both the hot gas bypass and hot gas reheat circuits simultaneously.

The HGBP Valve Output is On (energized) whenever Unit

State is Cooling and dehumidification operation is inactive.

The HGBP Valve Output is Off (de-energized) any other time.

OM 920-4 87

Operator’s Guide

Dehumidification Reheat Control

During dehumidification control either an analog or digital

Hot Gas Reheat (HGRH) output or the standard modulating heating output is controlled to maintain the current Reheat

Setpoint. If Reheat Type software configuration parameter is set to Staged Hot Gas, then a digital HGRH output is controlled to maintain the Reheat Setpoint. If the Reheat

Type software configuration parameter is set to Modulating

Hot Gas, then an analog HGRH output is controlled to maintain the Reheat Setpoint. If the Reheat Type software configuration parameter is set to Standard Heat, then the normal heating analog output is controlled to maintain the

Reheat Setpoint.

• Cooling/Fan Only: In the Cooling and Fan Only states, a

PI Loop is used to control the HGRH valve to maintain the Discharge Air Temperature at the Dehumidification

Reheat Setpoint. The deadband for this loop is the same one used for other control of heating to maintain the

DAT Heating setpoint.

• Cooling: In the Cooling state, the Dehumidification

Reheat Setpoint equals the DAT Cooling Setpoint. For

DAT units, this is the normal DAT setpoint resulting from any reset. For Zone Control units, this setpoint is the result of a PI Loop based on the control temperature as is done in the Economizer state or with modulated cooling in the Cooling state.

• Fan Only: In the Fan Only state, the Dehumidification

Reheat Setpoint equals an editable MaxReheatSpt

(Default = 65°F) when the control temperature drops to the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint and equals an editable MinReheatSpt (Default = 55°F) when the control temperature rises to the Occupied or

Unoccupied Cooling setpoint. The Dehumidification

Reheat Setpoint varies linearly between these two points.

This means that no matter what the Control Temperature is, including OAT, the temperature leaving the unit is at a maximum just before the unit needs to go into heating and at a minimum just before the unit needs to go into cooling. This reduces opportunity for unit to go into heating or cooling during dehumidification.

Staged HGRH Control

In the Cooling and Fan Only states, a staged output is turned on and off to control the HGRH valve to maintain the discharge air temperature at the Dehumidification Reheat

Setpoint. The deadband for this setpoint is an adjustable.

When the DAT is above the Dehumidification Reheat

Setpoint by more than half the deadband, cooling capacity is greater than 0% and the Dehumidification Reheat Timer has expired, the reheat output is turned on. When the DAT is below the Dehumidification Reheat Setpoint by more than half the deadband and the Dehumidification Reheat Timer has expired, or if the cooling capacity is 0%, the reheat output is turned off.

Modulating HGRH Control

In the Cooling and Fan Only states, a PI Loop is used to control the HGRH valve to maintain the discharge air temperature at the Dehumidification Reheat Setpoint. The PI

Loop is enabled when the unit is in the Cooling or Fan Only operating state and dehumidification becomes active.

NOTE:

When configured for modulating hot gas reheat the reheat valve is stroked open and then closed every day at 2:00 AM as long as dehumidification is inactive and the unit is not in the Cooling operating state at the time .

88 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Energy Recovery

Energy recovery is provided by drawing outside air across half of an enthalpy wheel and drawing exhaust air across the other half. Latent and sensible heat is transferred from the hotter, moister exhaust air to the colder dryer outside air in winter. Latent and sensible heat is transferred from the hotter more moist outside air to the cooler dryer exhaust air in summer. Control consists of starting and stopping an exhaust fan, modulating the speed of the exhaust fan, starting and stopping the enthalpy wheel, and optionally controlling the speed of the enthalpy wheel. The outdoor dampers are controlled in the normal manner. The current statuses as well as editable parameters associated with energy recovery are located in the Energy Rec Setup menu.

Enthalpy Wheel

The enthalpy wheel is turned on when all of the following are true. The speed of the enthalpy wheel is set to the maximum speed for units with a VFD controlling the speed of the enthalpy wheel.

• The exhaust fan is on

• The OA Dampers are at the minimum position

• The unit is not in the Economizer operating state

• The enthalpy wheel has not been turned off due to frost prevention (variable or constant speed wheels)

• The enthalpy wheel has not been turned off due to defrost control (constant speed wheels only)

• The wheel has not been turned off due to Variable

Effectiveness Operation

The enthalpy wheel is turned off when any of the following is true

• The exhaust fan is off

• The OA Damper Position is driven above the Minimum

OA Damper Position by more than 3%.

• Either of the frost prevention functions dictate that the wheel be off.

• The constant speed wheels defrost function dictates the wheel is to be off.

Enthalpy Wheel Frost Prevention

Two different frost protection methods are provided depending on whether or not the enthalpy wheel is controlled by a VFD. When there is a threat of frost or condensation on the enthalpy wheel, a variable speed wheel may be first slowed down and then stopped and a constant speed wheel may be stopped so that less enthalpy transfer occurs and frosting or condensation on the enthalpy wheel is avoided. In either case the frost control is based on an Intersection Point described as follows:

Condensation and frosting can occur on the enthalpy wheel when the exhaust air leaving the wheel is saturated.

This condition will occur when two lines intersect on a psychometric chart, and it will not occur when these two lines do not intersect. One of these lines is the Humidity

Ratio versus the dry bulb for saturated air. The other line is the Humidity Ratio versus the dry bulb temperature of the exhaust air leaving the enthalpy wheel. The two ends of this second straight line on a psychometric chart are the

OAT at 95% RH and the return air temperature at the return air relative humidity. One line showing frosting conditions and another line showing no frost conditions are shown on the sketch of a psychometric chart shown. A continuous calculation determines if and at what temperatures these two lines intersect. If they do intersect they intersect at two points. The higher of the two points is referred to as the

“Intersection Point”. When they do not intersect, the enthalpy wheel runs at full speed. When they do intersect, the variable speed enthalpy wheel may be slowed to its minimum speed as described above to maintain the dry bulb temperature of the exhaust air leaving the enthalpy wheel high enough to eliminate the Intersection Point and therefore the threat of frosting conditions. If slowing the wheel does not eliminate the Intersection Point after a stage time period, the wheel may be stopped. A constant speed wheel is stopped when an

Intersection Point exists.

Figure 13: Exhaust Air Psychometric Chart

OM 920-4 89

Operator’s Guide

Constant Speed Wheel Frost Prevention Control

The enthalpy wheel is stopped when both of the following are true:

• The enthalpy wheel has been on for longer than the edited Wheel Stage Time

• The exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel is below the Intersection Point plus an edited minimum temperature difference.

• Defrost Method=ExhAir

• Enthalpy wheel is constant speed

The enthalpy wheel is turned back on when the wheel has been off due to Frosting/Condensation for longer than an edited Minimum Off Time and the exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel is above the Intersection Point plus an edited Maximum Temperature Difference.

Variable Speed Wheel Frost Prevention Control

The enthalpy wheel VFD speed is set to a minimum wheel speed (default 5%) value when all of the following are true:

• The enthalpy wheel has been operating at maximum speed for longer than the edited Wheel Stage Time

• The exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel is below the Intersection Point plus an edited Minimum

Temperature Difference.

• Enthalpy wheel is variable speed

To prevent Frosting/Condensation on the enthalpy wheel, the enthalpy wheel is turned off when both of the following are true:

• The exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel is below the Intersection Point plus an edited Minimum

Temperature Difference.

• The wheel has been operating at the minimum wheel speed for longer than an edited Wheel Stage Time

The enthalpy wheel is turned on at minimum speed when both of the following are true:

• The enthalpy wheel has been off due to Frosting/

Condensation for longer than an edited Minimum Off

Time

• The exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel is above the Intersection Point plus an edited Maximum

Temperature Difference.

The Enthalpy Wheel speed will be increased to its maximum speed when both of the following are true:

• The exhaust air temperature leaving the enthalpy wheel is above the Intersection Point plus an edited Maximum

Temperature Difference (MaxExhTDiff)

• The wheel has been operating at the minimum speed for longer than the edited Wheel Stage Time

90

Enthalpy Wheel Defrost Control (Constant Speed

Wheels Only)

In lieu of the frost prevention method described above, a constant speed enthalpy wheel can be set for a simpler timed defrost method of frost management. With this method the enthalpy wheel is stopped periodically for a defrost time duration when the outdoor air temperature is below an outdoor frost temperature threshold setpoint.

Defrost operation becomes enabled when all of the following are true:

• Defrost Method = Timed

• Energy wheel is constant speed

• OAT is less than the OA frost temperature setpoint.

• Normal wheel operation has the enthalpy wheel on

When defrost operation is enabled, the wheel is stopped for the Defrost Time (default 5 minutes) every Defrost Period

(default 60 minutes).

When the wheel is stopped due to defrost operation the wheel must be slowly rotated so that both halves of the wheel are allowed to be defrosted by the relative warm exhaust air leaving the wheel. This is accomplished by alternately turning the wheel off for the editable Defrost Off Time (default 24 seconds) and on for the editable Defrost On time (default 1 second) during defrost operation.

Enthalpy Wheel Capacity Limiting

Enthalpy wheel capacity limiting control is a means to limit the capacity of an energy wheel during part load conditions.

Normally wheels are sized for worst case winter/summer load and, therefore, at part load the wheel may be oversized.

Capacity limiting control is allowed when the energy recovery wheel leaving air temperature (ERDAT) sensor is present and reliable and the outdoor air temperature (OAT) is colder than the returning air temperature.

Capacity limiting control is not allowed during dehumidification operation or when either the wheel frost prevention or defrost operation are active.

Capacity limiting operation differs depending on whether the energy recovery wheel is constant or variable speed.

Constant Speed Wheel

The conditions that cause the energy recovery wheel to turn due to capacity limiting are different depending on the unit operation state as follows:

Fan Only

When the unit is operating in the Fan Only state, the energy recovery wheel is stopped due to capacity limiting whenever the discharge air temperature (DAT) is above the

MinDATLimit setpoint by more than ½ the discharge air heating deadband. The wheel is re-started when the DAT falls back to or below the MinDATLimit setpoint plus ½ the discharge air heating deadband.

OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Heating

When the unit is operating in the Heating state, the energy recovery wheel is stopped due to capacity limiting whenever all heating is off and the discharge air temperature (DAT) is above the discharge heating setpoint by more than ½ the discharge air heating deadband. The wheel is re-started when the DAT falls back to or below the discharge heating setpoint plus ½ the discharge air heating deadband.

Cooling

When the unit is operating in the Cooling state, the energy recovery wheel is stopped due to capacity limiting whenever the energy recovery wheel leaving air temperature (ER LAT) is above the discharge cooling setpoint by more than ½ the discharge air cooling deadband. The wheel is re-started when the ER LAT falls back to or below the discharge cooling setpoint plus ½ the discharge air cooling deadband.

Variable Speed Wheel

When the enthalpy wheel is variable speed and the Variable

Effectiveness Control PI_Loop is active the ER LAT is controlled to the current effective discharge temperature setpoint.

Exhaust Fan

A variable speed exhaust fan controlled by a VFD is provided for all Economizer units with either constant volume or VAV supply fans and on 100% Outside Air units with VAV supply fans. Either a constant volume exhaust fan or a variable speed exhaust fan controlled by a VFD may be provided on 100%

Outside Air units with constant volume supply fans.

The exhaust fan is turned on when any of the following sets of conditions is true:

All four of the following are true:

• The Exhaust Fan is controlled by a VFD

• The OA Dampers are at least open to the Minimum OA

Position

• The Minimum OA Position is greater than 0%

• The building static pressure is above the building static pressure setpoint by more than the deadband for longer than the Minimum Exhaust Fan Start Time (Default =

120 seconds)

All four of the following are true:

• The exhaust fan is controlled by a VFD

• The OA Dampers are at least open to the Minimum OA

Position

• The Minimum OA Position is greater than 0%

• The exhaust fan capacity is commanded to a value above the minimum value (Default = 5%) by a BAS for longer than the Minimum Exhaust Fan Start Time (Default =

120 seconds)

Both of the following are true:

• The exhaust fan is constant volume

• The supply fan has been commanded on for at least 4 seconds

The exhaust fan is turned off when any of the following sets of conditions is true:

All three of the following are true:

• The exhaust fan is controlled by a VFD

• The building static pressure is below the building static pressure setpoint by more than the deadband

• The exhaust fan capacity is at or below its minimum value (Default = 5%) for longer than the Min Exhaust

Fan Stop Time (Default = 120 seconds)

Both of the following are true:

• The exhaust fan is controlled by a VFD

• The exhaust fan capacity is commanded to less than or equal to its minimum value (Default = 5%) by the BAS for longer than the Minimum Exhaust Fan Stop Time

(Default = 120 seconds)

The exhaust fan is off when the supply fan is off

Whenever a variable speed exhaust fan is on, its capacity will be modulated using a VFD. The speed of the fan will be either

(1) modulated to maintain the building static pressure at a desired value or (2) set at a fixed speed provided by a Building

Automation System via a network.

OM 920-4 91

Operator’s Guide

Bypass Dampers (Not Applicable for 100% OA

Units)

The bypass dampers are driven closed (Bypass Damper

Closed output is energized) whenever the OA Damper position is less than or equal to the Minimum OA Position

The Bypass dampers are driven open (Bypass Damper Open output is energized) whenever the OA Damper Position exceeds the Minimum OA Damper Position by more that 3%

Outside Air Damper Control

Minimum Outside Air Damper Control

Control of the dampers in the Economizer state is described in the Economizer Control section. The outdoor air dampers are driven open in the cooling operating state if economizer operation is enabled and to the Minimum OA Position if economizer operation is disabled. For all other operating conditions, the outdoor air dampers are set to the Minimum

OA Position. The Minimum OA Position is set to zero or closed position when the supply fan is off, the unit is in the

Recirculation state, Occupancy is set to Unocc, or the fan has been on for less than the Zero OA Time.

As a result, the OA dampers are driven closed in night setback, night setup, morning warm-up, and morning cool down situations unless economizer operation is required. In all other conditions the Minimum OA Position is equal to or below a Ventilation Limit and equal to or above a Demand

Control Ventilation limit. For CAV units, the Ventilation

Limit equals the keypad editable Vent Limit and the Demand

Control Ventilation Limit equals the keypad editable DCV

Limit. For VAV units, the Ventilation Limit varies with VFD speed between the editable Vent Limit at 100% Supply Fan speed and the editable LoFlo Vent Limit at the Min Clg Spd, as shown in

Figure 14 . For VAV units, the Demand Control

Ventilation Limit varies as the Ventilation Limit value changes so that the ratio between them remains constant.

In the example shown in

Figure 14

the Demand Control

Ventilation Limit would always be 1/2 the Ventilation Limit since the DCV Limit= parameter (10%) is half of the Vent

Limit= parameter (20%).

The editable parameters are to be determined when the airflow for the unit is balanced and are located in the Min OA

Set-up menu.

NOTE:

The MinClgSpd is prevented from being set equal to the Design Cooling Speed . The DCV Limit is prevented from being set greater than the Vent Limit .

If the VentLimit or the LoFloVent Limit is set to 0, the

Ventilation Limit is overridden to 0 .

Figure 14: Damper Position versus Fan Speed Chart

Cold Start Operation

A special “cold start” sequence will slow the opening of the dampers when it is cold outdoors and the unit is equipped with either Hot water/Steam or F&BP heating. This is to try to prevent nuisance freezestat trips associated with dampers opening up rapidly to minimum position before the heat has a chance to ramp up. This “cold start” sequence is initiated if the following conditions are all true:

• OAT is below the current LoDATLimit

• The unit is equipped with an Airside Economizer

• The current Unit State is beyond the Recirc

• The current Minimum Outdoor Damper Position set point is greater than 0%

• The unit is equipped with Hot water/Steam or F&BP heating

When the sequence is active the dampers will move more slowly the colder it is outdoors. The minimum and maximum ramp rates are adjustable via the keypad by navigating to the

Commission Unit/Min OA Set-up menu. The effective ramp rate will vary from the minimum 40% 100% (Minimum)

Airflow rate at OAT equal to -30°F to the maximum at OAT equal to 100°F. Once the damper position reaches a point

1% below the actual effective minimum position normal operation will begin. If the unit enters the Economizer operating state before the damper regulation begins, the regulation will begin from the current economizer position.

92 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Minimum Outside Air Reset - None

If None is selected as the Min OA Reset Type, the Minimum

OA Position is set equal to the Ventilation Limit. The Demand

Control Ventilation Limit value is ignored when Min OA reset is set to None.

Minimum Outside Air Reset - Network Control

If Network is selected as the Min OA Reset Type and a valid value for the minimum position is provided via a network the

Minimum OA Position is set equal to that value. The network is only allowed to write a value that is between the Ventilation

Limit and the Demand Control Ventilation Limit current values. If Network is selected as the Min OA Reset Type and a valid value for the minimum position is not provided, the

Min OA position is set equal to the Ventilation Limit.

Minimum Outside Air Reset - External Control

If ExtV is selected as the Min OA Reset Type, the Minimum

OA Position is calculated based on an external 0-10 VDC signal. If ExtmA is selected as the Min OA Type, the

Minimum OA Position is calculated based on an external

0-20 mA signal. This calculated Minimum OA Position varies linearly from zero % at the editable minimum external signal to the maximum value at the editable maximum external signal, but it is set no lower than the Demand Control

Ventilation Limit and no higher than the Ventilation Limit.

Minimum Outside Air Reset -IAQ

If either IAQV or IAQ mA is selected as the Min OA Type, the Minimum OA Position is calculated based on a 0-10V or

0-20 mA CO2 sensor input. The CO2 level is expressed as

Parts Per Million. The minimum and maximum sensor input values (0-10V or 0-20 mA) and the corresponding minimum and maximum PPM values are user defined. This calculated

Minimum OA Position varies linearly from the Demand

Control Ventilation Limit at the “PPM @ DCV Limit” to the

Ventilation Limit at the “PPM @ VentLimit””. The “PPM @

DCV Limit” is not allow to be set equal to or greater than the

“PPM @ VentLimit”

Examples of typical Min OA reset schedules .

If IAQ VDC is selected as the Min OA Type, the Minimum

OA Position is calculated based on a 0-10V CO2 sensor input.

The CO2 level is expressed as PPM (Parts Per Million). The minimum and maximum sensor input values (0-10V) and the corresponding minimum and maximum PPM values are user changeable. This calculated Minimum OA Position varies linearly from the Demand Control Ventilation Limit at the value labeled “PPM @ DCV Limit” to the Ventilation Limit at the value labeled “PPM @ VentLimit”. The “PPM @ DCV

Limit” is not allow to be set equal to or greater than the “PPM

@ VentLimit”

Example #1 Min OA reset type = IAQ VDC

If the requirement is to have the OA damper be at its minimum (Demand Control Ventilation Limit) when the

CO2 levels are less than 800PPM and to be at its maximum

(Ventilation Limit) when the CO2 levels are greater than

1000PPM, the controller would be set up as follow:

• Vent Limit = 100%

• Lo Flow Vent Limit = 100%

• DCV Limit = 0%

• Min OA reset type = IAQ VDC

• PPM@DCV Limit = 800

• PPM@Vent Limit = 1000

• IAQ PPM = Current PPM

• Min PPM = 0 (From CO2 transducer)

• Max PPM = 2000 (From CO2 transducer)

• V/A @ Min PPM = 0 VDC

• V/A @ Max PPM = 10 VDC

In this example the Minimum OA Position would vary linearly from 0% outside air at 800PPM or less to 100% outside air at 1000PPM or greater.

Examples of typical Min OA reset schedules .

If EXT VDC is selected as the Min OA Type, the Minimum

OA Position is calculated based on an external 0-10 VDC signal. This calculated Minimum OA Position varies linearly from zero % at the changeable minimum external signal to

100% at the changeable maximum external signal, but it is set no lower than the Demand Control Ventilation Limit and no higher than the Ventilation Limit.

Example #2 Min OA reset type = EXT VDC

If the requirement is to have the OA damper be at its minimum (Demand Control Ventilation Limit) when the field supplied signal is at its minimum (0VDC) and to be at its maximum (Ventilation Limit) when the field supplied signal is at its maximum (10VDC), the controller would be set up as follow:

• Vent Limit = 100%

• Lo Flow Vent Limit = 100%

• DCV Limit = 10%

• Min OA reset type = EXT VDC

• OA@MinV/mA = 0%

• OA@MaxV/mA = 100%

• Min V/mA = 0 VDC

• Max V/mA = 10 VDC

In this example the Minimum OA Position would vary linearly from 0% outside air at 0 VDC to 100% outside air at

10 VDC.

OM 920-4 93

Operator’s Guide

Reset Temperature Limit

The user has the option of setting a low temperature limit that will override all the outdoor air reset functions described in this section except the Return Fan Capacity Override function if the discharge air temperature or entering fan temperature gets too cold as a result of the reset. The user can choose the override sensor by setting the Reset Temperature Limit to

None, DAT or EFT. When set to None the Reset Temperature

Limit function is disabled. A Reset Temperature Limit PI_

Loop will be used to reset the minimum outside air damper setpoint downward when the selected temperature input drops below the Reset Temperature Limit.

Minimum Position Control -Field Supplied Outdoor

Airflow Station Input

When the OA Flow Station parameter in the Software

Configuration Code is set to Field Station and the Field

Station parameter on the keypad is set to VDC or mA, the Minimum OA Position value is adjusted based on the measured amount of outdoor air being brought into the unit from a field supplied airflow monitoring station. If the airflow is below the desired value, the Minimum OA Position is increased and if the airflow is above the desired value,

Minimum OA Position is decreased.

The field airflow signal will be in the form of a 0-10V or 0-20 mA input. The minimum and maximum sensor input values

(0-10V or 0-20 mA) and the corresponding minimum and maximum CFM values are user editable.

NOTE:

The Minimum OA Position is reset up and down between the Ventilation Limit and the Demand

Control Ventilation Limit by a PI_Loop function to maintain the field OA CFM value at an adjustable OA

CFM Setpoint .

When the MinOAType is set to Ext or IAQ and the

Field OA Station parameter is set to VDC or mA, the

OA flow input is assigned to a specially added I/O expansion module (EXPE) position X1 . When the

MinOAType is not set to Ext or IAQ and the Field OA

Station parameter is set to VDC or mA, the OA flow input is assigned to the main control board(MCB) position X1 .

Minimum Position Control - Design Flow (RPS

Airside Economizer Units Only)

When the OA Flow Station parameter in the Unit configuration menu is set to Design Flow and the Design

Flow control flag is set to Yes, the minimum outside air damper position is controlled to maintain the minimum OA flow setpoint. Design Flow is only available when for RTU units with Airside Economizers.

When the DesignFlow control flag is set to Yes, the Minimum

OA Position value is adjusted based on the measured amount of outdoor air being brought into the unit using a PI_Loop function. If the airflow is below the desired value, the

Minimum OA Position is increased and if the airflow is above the desired value, Minimum OA Position is decreased.

94

NOTE:

The factory default for Min OA Reset is set to none however changes may be made by accessing the Min

OA Set-Up menu . Once changes have been made to the Min OA Reset type, the Apply Changes flag must be changed from no to yes in order for the controller to recognize the changes . Setting the Apply Changes flag to YES will automatically reset the controller.

0-30%OA Units

A two position 0-30% OA actuator is controlled by a modulating analog output. This actuator is driven to its fully open position, nominally 30%, when the OA damper analog output is at its maximum value and it is driven closed when the OA damper analog output is at its minimum value.

The desired minimum open position between 0% and 30% normally is set by an editable keypad menu item (Vent Limit).

If a valid value is provided via the network, that position is used as the desired minimum open position instead of the keypad value.

The two position damper is driven to the closed position when the supply fan is off (Off and Startup state), the unit is in the

Recirculation state, unoccupied operation is active, or the fan has been on for less than the Zero OA Time. As a result the

OA dampers are driven closed in night setback, night setup, morning warm-up, and morning cool down situations. The two position damper is driven to the desired minimum open position in all other conditions.

The Ventilation Limit equals the keypad editable Vent Limit and the Demand Control Ventilation Limit equals the keypad editable DCV Limit. The Vent Limit cannot be set higher than the 0-30%OAMax value. The DCV Limit cannot be set higher than the Vent Limit.

Return Fan Capacity Override (RTU Airside

Economizer Units Only)

The minimum position determined by any method below may be overridden for a variable speed return fan when the return fan speed is below the supply fan speed by more than an adjustable value. In this situation, the outdoor air damper minimum position is reset up based on the schedule shown below if normal control of the minimum position would result in a lower value. The minimum position will be controlled in the normal manner if that results in a higher value than determined by the reset schedule.

OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Table 50: Outdoor Air Damper Minimum Position Reset

Schedule

Discharge Fan

Speed – Return

Fan Speed

Outdoor Air

Damper Minimum

Position

<= 20% Min Fan

Differential

Demand Control

Ventilation Limit

Between Min and

Max Differential

>= 50% Max Fan

Differential

Linear

Interpolation

Ventilation Limit

NOTE:

If the supply fan is a constant volume fan, the

Supply Fan Speed is assumed to be 100% when the discharge fan is on . If the Min Fan Differential is set equal to the Max Fan Differential, the return fan capacity override value reverts to the Ventilation

Limit . Thiscapability is not provided for exhaust fans .

Building Static Pressure Override (Airside

Economizer Units Only)

The minimum position determined by any method described below may be overridden for a variable speed return fan or exhaust fan controlled by building static pressure when the return fan speed is at minimum or the exhaust fan has been stopped due to low building static pressure if the building pressure remains negative. If the user elects to use this function and the return fan has been at the minimum speed or the exhaust fan has been stopped for a minimum return/ exhaust fan off time (default = 120 seconds) a PI_Loop will begin modulating the Min OA Pos setpoint upward to maintain the building static pressure at the building static pressure setpoint.

100% Outside Air Damper Control, Two

Position

100% OA two position actuators are controlled by a digital output for SCU unit and by a modulating analog output for

RTU units.

• Digital Output - The OA damper is driven fully open when the digital output is On and fully closed when the digital output is Off

• Analog Output (100%OA Units) - The OA damper is driven to its 100% open position when the OA damper analog output is at its maximum value and it is driven closed when the OA damper analog output is at its minimum value

The OA damper is open during the Start Initial period, and it remains open during all operating states. The OA damper remains open after the fan is turned off until 30 seconds after the Airflow Switch digital input indicates loss of airflow. This keeps the outside air dampers open in case there is a failure or external override that keeps the fan running after it is turned off by controller logic. If the fan is turned on by bypassing the controls that have it off, the Damper Output is NOT turned on.

Airside Economizer

If a unit is equipped with a 0-100% modulating economizer, and the outdoor air is suitable for free cooling, the unit attempts to satisfy the cooling load by using outdoor air before using mechanical cooling. When the control temperature is above the Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling

Set Point by more than half the Occupied or Unoccupied

Cooling Dead Band and the discharge air temperature is above the Discharge Cooling Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band, the controller enters the

Econo state. When the unit is in the Econo operating state, the outdoor air dampers are modulated as required to maintain the Discharge Cooling Set Point.

Economizer to Cooling Operating State

The transition from the Econo to Cooling operating state occurs when the economizer is unable to satisfy the cooling load and mechanical cooling is available. This will occur when the commanded economizer position indicates more than 95% open and the discharge air temperature (DAT control units) or control temperature (Zone control units) is above the applicable Cooling Setpoint by more than half the applicable Cooling Deadband for longer than the Cooling

Interstage Timer.

Waterside Economizer

If a unit is equipped with a 0-100% modulating waterside economizer, and the conditions are suitable for free cooling, the unit attempts to satisfy the cooling load by using waterside economizer before using mechanical cooling. When the control temperature is above the Cooling Enable Set Point by more than half the Cooling Enable Dead Band and the discharge air temperature is above the Discharge Cooling Set

Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band, the controller enters the Econo state. When the unit is in the

Econo operating state, the economizer valve is modulated as required to maintain the Discharge Cooling Set Point.

OM 920-4 95

Operator’s Guide

Bypass Valve Control

This section describes the operation of an analog output used to control a valve that allows water to bypass a waterside economizer and flow directly into a condenser.

When the bypass valve is closed, all water flows through the waterside economizer before it flows through the condenser.

Figure 15: Bypass Control Diagram

When the Bypass Valve is open, all water that flows into the self-contained unit flows directly to the condenser without any water going through the waterside economizer. There are two different methods for controlling this valve; Slave Control and Bypass Control.

Slave Control

The bypass valve is linked electrically to the economizer valve so that the bypass valve closes as the economizer opens.

This provides a nearly constant flow of water through the unit regardless of the requirements of the economizer. When there is no cooling required, the bypass valve will be open and the waterside economize r valve is closed allowing water to flow through the condenser. This valve control option can be used in either a variable or constant pumping system.

Bypass Control

The bypass valve and waterside economizer valve are independently controlled. . The bypass valve to the condenser is closed in all states except the Fan only, Mechanical cooling, and Economizer. The bypass valve is open when mechanical cooling is required and the water is not flowing through the waterside economizer. When the unit is Off: Unoccupied, both the bypass valve and the waterside economizer valve are closed. No water is allowed to flow through the unit. This valve control option is typically used in variable pumping system or a constant pumping system with a bypass loop

Water Regulating Valve Control

In the Cooling state, the Water Regulating Valve stays at its last commanded position when the last compressor is turned off.

When all compressors are off and a compressor needs to be turned on, the Water Regulating Valve must be driven open long enough to prevent the compressor from being locked out due to high pressure, but not so long that it is locked out due to low pressure. The WRV Start Sequence described below is used to make sure this is the case. This is required when transitioning to the Cooling state from the Fan Only or

Economizer state.

In the Fan Only state, the Water Regulating Valve is normally closed. The WRV Start Sequence described below is initiated in the Fan Only state whenever all of the following are true:

• Cooling Status=Enabled or Off Ambient

• Airside Economizer operation is disabled or not installed

• Either of the following are true:

Both of the following are true:

— Control Temperature Source is something other than None

— Control Temperature > Occupied Cooling

Setpoint + ½ the cooling dead band

Both of the following are true:

— Control Temperature Source is set to None

DAT > DAT Cooling Setpoint + ½ the cooling dead band

96 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

In the Economizer state, the Water Regulating Valve is normally closed. The WRV Start Sequence described below is initiated in the Economizer state whenever either of the following is true:

All of the following are true:

• All of the following are true:

Cooling Status=Enabled or Off Ambient

Economizer Position is greater than 95.0% for more than the Cooling Stage Time AND

– Discharge Air Temperature > DAT Cooling Setpoint

+ ½ the cooling dead band for more than the Cooling

Stage Time

• Both of the following are true:

Cooling enabled AND

Economizer Disabled

Water Pump Control

The Pump output is in the on position if any of the following are true:

• The Bypass Valve output is being driven above 0%

• The Water Regulating Valve output is being driven above 0%

• A waterside economizer is installed and the unit is in the

Economizer state

• The unit is the Cooling state

• The Unit is in the Start Initial state and Flush Mode is set to Yes

• The unit has a waterside economizer and a Freeze Fault or Freeze Problem is active

• The unit has a waterside economizer and 10 minutes have not yet passed after a Freeze Fault or Freeze

Problem has disappeared

WRV Start Sequence

The following Startup Sequence is followed when a stage up from stage zero is required and the Water Regulating Valve is closed.

The Water Regulating Valve is set to an minimum(Default =

10%)

The Entering Water Temperature (EWT) is measured after the WRV has been at its minimum position for a default of 60 seconds. An Initial WRV Position is then calculated based on the measured EWT. The Unit transitions to Cooling and the first compressor is started when the time to initial position has passed. The first compressor runs for an editable

Initial Operation Time with the WRV at the calculated initial position. Control then reverts to normal PI control.

Cooling: Multistage

Entering the Cooling Operating State

The unit enters the Cooling operating state from the Fan Only operating state when the control temperature rises above the

Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling Set Point by more than half the Cooling Dead Band and the discharge air temperature is above the discharge cooling setpoint by more than half the cooling Dead Band. The unit transitions from Cooling to Fan only when the control temperature falls below the Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling Set Point by more than half the

Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling Dead Band. The unit will also transition from the Cooling to Fan only operating state if

Cooling operation is disabled due to OA ambient lockout.

Special Procedures for Units with WRV and More

• When the unit enters Cooling, a compressor on either circuit # 1 or # 2 must start first if one is enabled because the pressure sensors are on circuits # 1 and # 2.

• If both circuits # 1 and #2 are disabled due to High

Pressure or Low Pressure alarms, the lead compressor is determined by the compressor circuit that contains the compressor with the fewest run hours.

• If both circuit # 1 and circuit # 2 are disabled, The WRV will be controlled based on the EWT and the calculated initial position.

• Control of the WRV reverts to normal PI control if either circuit # 1 or circuit # 2 is enabled and its compressor is turned on.

• All compressors are disabled if EWT drops below the minimum WRV temperature value by more than the

Outside air cooling lockout differential.

• Compressors are re-enabled if EWT rises above the minimum WRV temperature value.

Staging -DAT Control

In the Cooling state, compressor stages are turned on and off to maintain an average Discharge Air Temperature near the Discharge Cooling Setpoint. When the load is such that cooling capacity is being staged up and down between two stages, this control sequence causes the unit to operate longer at the stage that produces the discharge air temperature that is closer to the setpoint over time which results in an average discharge air temperature that is very close to the Discharge

Cooling Setpoint. This setpoint may be fixed or reset as described in the Cooling DAT Reset section. External devices such as VAV boxes maintain the desired space conditions.

The unit may be a Constant Volume unit, but it is normally a

Variable Air Volume unit. If the Discharge Air Temperature is approaching the setpoint, the number of stages continues to increase or decrease until the actual temperature gets within half the deadband. Control of cooling stages is based on two values, the Degree Time Above and the Degree Time Below the Discharge Cooling Setpoint. The difference between the actual discharge air temperature and the Discharge Cooling

Setpoint is added to one of the Degree Time values every ten seconds. If the Discharge Air Temperature exceeds Discharge

OM 920-4 97

Operator’s Guide

Cooling Setpoint, the difference is added to the Degree Time

Above value. If the Discharge Air Temperature is below the

Discharge Cooling Setpoint, the difference is added to the

Degree Time Below value. These values are limited to a maximum value of 250 to prevent remaining too long in one stage because one value or the other became very large.

When the unit enters the Cooling state the first compressor is turned on immediately. When the unit is equipped with evaporative condensing, the sump pump must be turned on before any compressor is turned on. If there is a sump pump fail condition, cooling will stay in stage 0.

With DAT staging control, there are four possible staging transitions; Stage up after stage up, stage up after stage down, stage down after stage down, and stage down after stage up.

These are described in the following paragraphs:

Stage Up After Stage Up:

If the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling stage timer, the discharge air temperature is greater than the

Discharge Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, the last stage change was a stage up, and dehumidification is not active; cooling capacity is increased by one stage

Stage Up After Stage Down:

If the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling stage timer, the discharge air temperature is greater than the

Discharge Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, the last stage change was a stage down, the Degree Time

Above value is greater than or equal to the Degree Time

Below value, and the dehumidification is not active; cooling capacity is increased one stage.

Stage Down After Stage Down:

If the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling stage timer, the discharge air temperature is less than the

Discharge Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, the last stage change was a stage down, and dehumidification is not active; cooling capacity is decreased one stage.

Stage Down After Stage Up:

If the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling stage timer, discharge air temperature is less than the

Discharge Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, the last stage change was a stage up, the Degree Time Below value is greater than or equal to the Degree Time Above value, and dehumidification is not active; cooling capacity is decreased one stage.

The Degree Time Below and Degree Time Above values change whenever a stage change occurs. If the previous stage change was a stage up and the number of stages increases again, both Degree Time Above and Degree Time Below are set to zero.

If the last stage change was a stage up and the stage decreases due to the Degree Time Below exceeding the Degree Time

Above, the Degree Time Below is reduced by an amount equal to Degree Time Above and then the Degree Time

Above is set to zero.

If the last stage change was a stage down and the stage increases due to the Degree Time Above exceeding the

Degree Time Below, the Degree Time Above is reduced by an amount equal to Degree Time Below and then the Degree

Time Below is set to zero.

Degree Time logic is not used when dehumidification is active. When dehumidification is active, cooling capacity is increased if the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling stage timer and the Leaving Coil Temperature (LCT) is greater than the Maximum Leaving Coil Setpoint. When dehumidification is active, cooling capacity is decreased if the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling stage timer amd the leaving coil temperature is less than the minimum leaving coil setpoint.

Average Discharge Control Method Illustration

Figure 10 is an illustration of the “Degree Time” compressor staging control method and is meant to show a variety of staging possibilities not normal unit operation. Figure 10 shows nine points on a graph of the discharge air temperature changing with time. The Cooling Interstage Timer setting is 5 minutes.

Point 1

Assume that the controller has just staged up and that DTA and DTB are zero. As a result, the discharge air temperature drops and the Cooling Interstage Timer is reset.

Point 2

DTA (Area A) equals DTB (Area B). The discharge air temperature is below the Effective Discharge Cooling Set

Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band.

However, since the Cooling Interstage Timer has not yet expired, no staging action occurs.

Point 3

The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired. DTB

(Area B + Area C) is greater than DTA (Area A) and the discharge air temperature is below the Effective Discharge

Cooling Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling

Dead Band. Therefore, cooling is staged down. As a result, the discharge air temperature rises, the Cooling Interstage

Timer is reset, and DTA is subtracted from both DTA and

DTB. This zeros DTA and leaves DTB equal to Area C.

Point 4

The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired. The discharge air temperature is above the Effective Discharge

Cooling Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling

Dead Band. However, since DTA (Area E) is not yet equal to DTB (Area C + Area D), no staging action occurs and the discharge air temperature continues to rise.

98 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Point 5

The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired. The discharge air temperature is above the Effective Discharge

Cooling Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling

Dead Band and DTA (Area E + Area F) is equal to DTB

(Area C + Area D). Therefore, cooling is staged up. As a result, the discharge air temperature drops, the Cooling

Interstage Timer is reset, and DTB is subtracted from both

DTB and DTA. This zeros both DTA and DTB since they are equal. Note that the elapsed time since the last stage change in

Figure 10 is 6.3 minutes.

Point 6

The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired. Because the cooling load is now increasing, the discharge air temperature does not fall below the Effective Discharge

Cooling Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling

Dead Band. No staging action occurs for two reasons: (1) the discharge air temperature is within the Discharge Cooling

Dead Band and (2) DTB (Area H) is not yet equal to DTA

(Area G). Even if the discharge air temperature falls below the Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point by more than half the Discharge Cooling Dead Band (as shown just after Point

6), a stage down does not occur because DTB remains less than DTA. The discharge air temperature starts rising again because the load is increasing.

Figure 16: Cooling Interstage Timer

Point 7

The discharge air temperature is again above the

Effective Discharge Cooling Set Point by more than half the

Discharge Cooling Dead Band. Since the Cooling Interstage

Timer expired at Point 6, cooling is staged up. As a result, both DTA and DTB are zeroed and the Cooling Interstage

Timer is reset. Note that DTA and DTB are both zeroed since two consecutive stage increase actions occurred. The discharge air temperature continues to rise, however, because the cooling load is still increasing. Note that the elapsed time since the last stage change in this illustration is 11.0 minutes.

Point 8

The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired. Since the discharge air temperature is still above the Effective

Discharge Cooling Set Point by more than half the Discharge

Cooling Dead Band, another stage-up occurs. As a result,

DTA (Area K) is again zeroed out (DTB remains zeroed) and the Cooling Interstage Timer is reset. The cooling load has leveled out, and the discharge air temperature drops.

Point 9 The Cooling Interstage Timer has expired at the same time that DTB (Area M) becomes equal to DTA (Area L).

Therefore, cooling is staged down, the Cooling Interstage

Timer is reset and DTA is subtracted from both DTA and

DTB. This zeros both DTA and DTB since they are equal.

OM 920-4 99

Operator’s Guide

Staging - Zone Control

In the Cooling state, compressor stages are turned on and off to maintain the control temperature close to the Occupied or

Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint. Use of the Projected Control

Temperature reduces overshoot during cool down. See the

Project Ahead section for a description of how the Project

Ahead Temperature is calculated.

When the unit enters the Cooling state or dehumidification operation begins the unit goes directly to Cooling Stage # 1 so that the first compressor is turned on immediately.

During normal cooling operation the number of compressor stages increases when the time since the last stage change exceeds the Cooling stage timer, Projected Control

Temperature is greater than the Occupied or Unoccupied

Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, the Control

Temperature is greater than the Occupied or Unoccupied

Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, and the

Discharge Air Temperature is greater than the minimum DAT cooling setpoint.

During normal cooling operation the number of compressor stages decreases when the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling stage timer, the Projected Control

Temperature is less than the Occupied or Unoccupied

Cooling Setpoint by more than half the deadband, the Control

Temperature is less than the Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling setpoint by more than half the deadband.

During normal cooling operation the compressor stages also decrease when the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling stage timer, and the discharge air temperature is less than the minimum DAT Cooling setpoint.

When Dehumidification is active, compressor stages are controlled to maintain the leaving coil temperature between the minimum leaving coil setpoint and the maximum leaving coil DAT setpoint.

During dehumidification on operation, the number of compressor stages increases if the time since the last stage change exceeds the cooling stage timer and the leaving coil temperature is greater than the Maximum Leaving Coil

Setpoint. During dehumidification operation, the number of compressor stages decreases if the time since the last stage change ecxeeds the cooling stage timer and the leaving coil temperature is less than the Minimum Leavaing Coil

Setpoint.

Project Ahead

This section describes the Projected Control Temperature used to turn on and off stages of heating and cooling for Zone

Control units. It is not used in DAT Control units.

In Zone Control cooling and heating operation, the Projected

Control Temperature, reduces overshoot as the zone temperature approaches a setpoint after startup. It does this by causing stages to stop increasing before the actual control temperature reaches the setpoint. The rate of change of the control temperature is calculated once per minute by the controller and equals the change during the last sixty seconds. This rate of change is multiplied by the Effective

Project Ahead Time and is added to the current control temperature. The rate of change may be negative or positive so the Projected Control Temperature may be higher or lower than the actual control temperature. This value, the Projected

Control Temperature, is the temperature that would exist after the Project Ahead Time passes if the control temperature were to continue to change at the same rate for the Effective

Project Ahead Time. The Effective Project Ahead Time is set equal to the Cooling Project Ahead Time when the unit is in the Cooling state. The Effective Project Ahead Time is set equal to the Heating Project Ahead Time when the unit is in the Heating state. It is set equal to zero under all other conditions causing the Projected Control Temperature to equal the actual control temperature

Cooling: Modulating

Modulating Cooling Control: Chilled Water

When the unit’s cooling type is set to chilled water and is in the Cooling operating state, or in the dehumidification operating state the chilled water valve is modulated to maintain the discharge air temperature at the Discharge

Cooling Set Point (or leaving coil temperature at the

Minimum Leaving Coil Setpoint if dehumidification is active).

Modulating Cooling Control: Face & Bypass

When the unit’s cooling type is set to Face & Bypass and is in the Cooling operating state, or in the dehumidification operating state, the chilled water valve is driven fully open and the face and bypass dampers are modulated to maintain the discharge air temperature at the Discharge Cooling Set

Point (or leaving coil temperature at the Minimum Leaving

Coil Setpoint if dehumidification is active).

100 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint Reset -

Cooling

The Cooling DAT Setpoint may be reset for units with DAT

Cooling Control. The reset type may be set to one of the following:

• None: Discharge Cooling Spt is user adjustable

• Network: Discharge Cooling Spt is equal to the Network

DAT Clg Setpoint when it is valid

• Space: Discharge Cooling Spt is based on the Space Sensor

• Return: Discharge Cooling Spt is based on the Return Air

Sensor

• OAT: Discharge Cooling Spt is based on the Outdoor Air

Temperature

• Ext mA: Discharge Cooling Spt is determined by a 0-20 mA signal

• Ext V: Discharge Cooling Spt is determined by a 0-10 VDC signal

• Airflow: Discharge Cooling Spt is based on the airflow as indicated by the variable frequency drive speed

Reset reverts from Return to None when a Return Air Sensor opens or shorts. Reset reverts from Space to None when a

Space Sensor opens or shorts. Reset reverts from OAT to

None when an Outdoor Air Sensor opens or shorts.

When Space, Return, OAT, Airflow, Ext mA, or Ext V is selected, the Discharge Cooling Spt equals the Max Clg Spt when the selected value equals the Max Clg Spt @ value.

Similarly, the Discharge Cooling Spt equals the Min Clg Spt when the selected value equals the Min Clg Spt @ value.

When Space, Return, OAT, or Airflow is selected, the reset schedule should be set so that the DAT Cooling setpoint decreases as the selected temperature increases as shown in the graph.

Figure 17: Cooling Setpoint

When Airflow is selected, the values “Min Clg Spt @” and

“Max Clg Spt @” are entered as percentage values. When Ext mA is selected, the values “Min Clg Spt @” and “Max Clg

Spt @” are entered as mA values. When Ext VDC is selected, the values “Min Clg Spt @” and “Max Clg Spt @” are entered as VDC values.

If Ext mA or Ext V is selected as the type of reset, the Min

Clg Spt @ value may be set above the Max Clg Spt @ value to cause a decrease in the DAT setpoint as the external signal or the Min Clg Spt @ value may be set below the Max Clg

Spt @ value to cause an increase in the DAT setpoint as the external signal increase.

The Min Clg Spt @ value can be set below the Max Clg Spt

@ value for all types of reset, but it only makes sense for external reset.

When ever the Clg Reset Type or Engineering Units is changed, the Min Clg Spt @ and Max Clg Spt @ values revert to default values as follows:

• None: Min Clg Spt @=0NA, Max Clg Spt @=100NA

• Network: Min Clg Spt @=0NA, Max Clg Spt @=100NA

• Space, Return: Min Clg Spt @=73.0F, Max Clg Spt

@=71.0F

• OAT: Min Clg Spt @=90.0F, Max Clg Spt @=70.0F

• ExtmA: Min Clg Spt @=4.0mA, Max Clg Spt

@=20.0mA

• ExtVDC: Min Clg Spt @=0.0V, Max Clg Spt @=10.0V

• Airflow: Min Clg Spt @=33%, Max Clg Spt @=100%

Condenser Fan Control

RPS Units

There are up to four condenser fans per circuit. The first fan on each circuit is always turned on when any compressor on the circuit is turned on through auxiliary switches on the compressor contactors. The second two fans on each circuit (if applicable) are controlled by outputs from the Main

Controller. These are controlled via Condenser Fan Output 1 and Condenser Fan Output 2. The last fan on each circuit (if applicable) is controlled by an external refrigerant pressure switch.

Condenser Fan Output 1 is turned on when any compressor on is on and the OAT rises above the Condenser Fan A

Set Point. Condenser Fan Output 1 is turned off when all compressors are off or the OAT drops below the Condenser

Fan 1 Set Point by more than the Condenser Fan Differential

(Default = 5°F). External relays allow operation of condenser fans associated with a specific circuit only when a compressor on that circuit is on.

OM 920-4 101

Operator’s Guide

Condenser Fan Output 2 is turned on when any compressor on is on and the OAT rises above the Condenser Fan B

Set Point. Condenser Fan Output 2 is turned off when all compressors are off or the OAT drops below the Condenser

Fan 2 Set Point by more than the Condenser Fan Differential

(Default = 5°F). External relays allow operation of condenser fans associated with a specific circuit only when a compressor on that circuit is on.

Condenser Fan Output 3 is turned on when any compressor on is on and the OAT rises above the Condenser Fan 3

Set Point. Condenser Fan Output 3 is turned off when all compressors are off or the OAT drops below the Condenser

Fan 3 Set Point by more than the Condenser Fan Differential

(Default = 5°F). External relays allow operation of condenser fans associated with a specific circuit only when a compressor on that circuit is on.

The Condenser Fan default setpoints vary by unit size according to the following tables:

Table 51: 410A Condenser Fan Setpoints

Unit

Size

079

080

081

085

090

091

100

101

050

051

060

062

063

068

070

071

075

105

110

120

125

130

140

015

016

020

021

025

026

030

031

035

040

042

045

CondFanOutput1

(MCB-DO7)

CondFanOutput2

(MCB-DO8)

PC13/PC231

50

65

65

65

60

55

60

60

60

60

65

75

75

70

Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential

70

75

70

75

5

5

5

5

70

70

75

75

65

65

70

60

70

70

65

70

65

60

70

75

75

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

85

5

90

90

90

35

35

35

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

80

90

85

85

85

80

85

85

85

85

80

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

90

90

90

90

90

90

90

90

90

90

90

90

90

90

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

Table 52: R22 Condenser Fan Setpoints

Unit

Size

045

050

060

070

075

015

018

020

025

030

036

040

080

090

105

70

65

65

60

25

40

65

65

65

0

CondFanOutput1

(MCB-DO7)

CondFanOutput2

(MCB-DO8)

CondFanOutput3

(MCB-DO6)

Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential

60 5 — — — —

60

60

65

65

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

0

0

0

70

5

5

5

5

70

70

75

75

75

45

5

5

5

5

5

5

Table 53: R407C Condenser Fan Setpoints

Unit

Size

050

060

070

075

080

090

105

015

018

020

025

030

036

040

045

CondFanOutput1

(MCB-DO7)

CondFanOutput2

(MCB-DO8)

CondFanOutput3

(MCB-DO6)

Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential Setpoint Differential

60

15

30

65

65

50

0

65

60

55

50

0

0

65

65

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

0

0

0

70

5

5

5

5

70

70

75

75

75

35

5

5

5

5

5

5

102 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

MPS Standard Condenser Fan Control

Standard Condenser Fan Control

Two, three or four condenser fans are provided. Two condenser fans are provided on 15, 17.5, 20 and 25 ton units.

Three condenser fans are provided on 26, 30 and 35 ton units.

Four condenser fans are provided on 40 and 50 ton units. The first condenser fan is always turned on when any compressor is turned on using compressor contactor auxiliary switches external to the controller.

When two condenser fans are provided, the second condenser fan (CondFanOutA) is turned on when the OAT rises above the Condenser Fan 1 Set Point. This fan is turned off when the OAT drops below the setpoint by more than the Condenser

Fan Differential (Default = 5°F).

When three condenser fans are provided, the second condenser fan is turned on when the OAT rises above the

Condenser Fan 1 Set Point and the third fan is turned on when the OAT rises above the Condenser Fan 2 Set Point.

These fans are turned off when the OAT drops below that corresponding setpoint by more than the Condenser Fan

Differential (Default = 5°F).

When four condenser fans are provided, there are two different methods for control due to a redesign of the model

040 and 050.

When the “old” four condenser fan method is used

(Condenser Control=Standard Method 1) is used, two outputs

(Condenser Fan Output1 and Condenser Fan Output 2) on the controller are used to provide three additional stages as shown in the table below. The second through fourth stages are turned on when the corresponding setpoint is exceeded by the OAT and turned off when the OAT drops below the corresponding setpoint by more than the Condenser Fan

Differential (Default = 5°F).

Table 54: Fan Staging

Operating

Fans (Stage)

1

Fan 1

(On with any compressor)

On

2

3

4

On

On

On

Fan 2

(Cond Fan

Out A)

Off

On

Off

On

Fan 3 and 4

(Cond Fan

Out B)

Off

Off

On

On

On

Condition

Any

Comp On

Cond Fan

1 Spt

Cond Fan

2 Spt

Cond Fan

3 Spt

When the “new” four condenser fan method is used

(Condenser Control=Standard Method 2), the condenser fan control is circuit specific. The first fan on each circuit is turned on using compressor contactor auxiliary switches.

The second fan on each circuit is turned on if a compressor on the circuit is on and the OAT is above the corresponding condenser fan setpoint and is turned off when the OAT drops below the corresponding setpoint by more than the Condenser

Fan Differential (Default = 5°F). Condense Fan 1 Setpoint corresponds to the second fan on Circuit 1 and Condenser Fan

2 Setpoint corresponds to the second fan on Circuit 2.

The default condenser fan setpoints vary by unit size as indicated below:

Figure 18: CondenserFan Setpoints

Unit Size

25

26

30

35

15

17

20

40 (Cond Ctrl=Std

Method 1)

50 (Cond Ctrl=Std

Method 1)

40 (Cond Ctrl=Std

Method 2)

50 (Cond Ctrl=Std

Method 2)

Condenser Fan Setpoints

Cond Fan 1 Spt

70°F/21 .11°C

70°F/21 .11°C

65°F/21 .11°C

65°F/21 .11°C

40°F/4 .44°C

40°F/4 .44°C

35°F/1 .67°C

Cond Fan 2 Spt

60°F/15 .56°C

60°F/15 .56°C

60°F/15 .56°C

Cond Fan Spt

25°F/-3 .89°C 45°F/7 .22°C 60°F/15 .56°C

35°F/1 .67°C

70°F/21 .11°C

70°F/21 .11°C

45°F/7 .22°C

70°F/21 .11°C

70°F/21 .11°C

55°F/12 .78°C

N/A

N/A

OM 920-4 103

Operator’s Guide

Evaporative Condensing Control (RTU)

The evaporative condensing option for rooftop units uses the heat absorbed by evaporating water as well as air drawn across a bank of tubes with refrigerant flowing through them to condense hot refrigerant to a liquid. Water is pumped from a sump beneath the condenser tubes to nozzles above the coil that spray water onto the bank of tubes. The refrigerant in the tubes is cooled and condensed as some of this water is evaporated when it strikes the hot tubes and is carried away by condenser fans. Using this method, the refrigerant can be cooled to a lower temperature than is the case with a normal finned condenser that transfers heat directly to the air.

A unit equipped with evaporative condensers cannot operate in the cooling state with the outdoor air temperature below

40°F. If the OAT Compressor Lockout Temperature on units with evaporative condensing is lowered below 40°F, it will immediately be set back up to 40°F.

The first condenser fan on each circuit is turned on and off via ModBus communications with a single VFD. The speed of these two fans is controlled via ModBus communications with the VFD. These two fans always operate at the same speed.

The second and third condenser fans on each compressor circuit are turned on and off using the two outputs on the

Main Board that are used for standard condenser fans. Relays are driven by each of these outputs so that fans associated with a circuit that is not operating will not be turned on.

Evaporative Condenser Compressor Staging Sequences

There are two cooling staging configurations available for evaporative condenser units. Both employ reciprocating compressors and so require pumpdown operation. When there is a first call for cooling on a circuit, the liquid line solenoid valve output is first energized and then as soon as the low pressure switch for that circuit closes the first compressor in the sequence is turned on. If the low pressure switch fails to close within the low pressure compressor delay timer setting the low pressure alarm for that circuit is generated.

The circuit that has the fewer run hours is the lead circuit if

Lead Circuit is set to Auto. The lead circuit is changed only when all compressors are off or at the maximum stages for the unit. If Lead Circuit is set to #1 then circuit #1 always leads if it is available. If Lead Circuit is set to #2 then circuit

#2 always leads if it is available.

The Staging Type can be set to either Standard or Alternate.

Standard

:

The two circuits are loaded up and unloaded as evenly as possible. When a stage up is required, the circuit operating at the lower stage is staged up. If both circuits are operating at the same stage, the lead circuit is staged up if it is not at its maximum stage.

When a stage down is required, the circuit operating at the higher stage is staged down if it is not at stage zero. If both circuits are operating at the same stage, the lag circuit is staged down if it is not at stage zero.

Alternate:

One circuit is loaded completely before the first compressor in the other circuit is turned on, and one circuit is unloaded completely before the other circuit begins to be unloaded.

When a stage up is required and the lead circuit is not at its maximum stage, the lead circuit is staged up.

When a stage up is required and the lead circuit is already at its maximum stage, the lag circuit is staged up. When a stage down is required and the Lag circuit is at a stage greater than zero, the lag circuit is staged down. When a stage down is required and the lag compressor is at stage zero, the lead compressor is staged down if it is not at stage zero.

A disabled circuit remains at stage zero. If the other circuit is enabled, it is staged up whenever a stage up is required, and down whenever a stage down is required. If a previously disabled circuit becomes enabled, the staging is re-aligned according to the staging tables upon the next call for stage increase or decrease. Note: During this re-alignment, the cooling stage time guaranteed on and off times must be observed as well as a minimum of 10 seconds between starting more than one compressor

When dehumidification is active staging reverts to Alternate regardless of the normal Staging Type setting. When dehumidification is not active staging is according to the

Staging Type setting.

104 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Table 55:

Dehumidification Staging

Two Compressors and Six Stages (CompCfg=4 & Cond Ctrl=2 or 3)

Stage

0

1

2

3

Comp

# 1

Off

On

On

On

Circuit # 1

Liq Line Valve

# 1

Off

On

On

On

Comp # 1

Unl # 2

Off

On

On

Off

Comp # 1

Unl # 1

Off

On

Off

Off

Comp

# 2

Off

On

On

On

Liq Line Valve

# 2

Off

On

On

On

Four Compressors and Eight Stages (CompCfg=E & Cond Ctrl=2 or 3)

Circuit # 2

Comp # 2

Unl # 2

Off

On

On

Off

Circuit # 1

Stage

2

3

4

0

1

Comp

# 1

Off

On

On

On

On

Liq Line Valve

# 1

Off

On

On

On

On

Comp # 1

Unl # 2

Off

Off

Off

On*

On

Comp # 1

Unl # 1

Off

On

Off

On

Off

Comp

# 2

Off

On

On

On

On

* Note: A 20 second delay will be provided after unloading compressor #1 or #2 prior to starting Compressor #3 or Compressor #4 .

Circuit # 2

Liq Line Valve

# 2

Off

On

On

On

On

Comp # 2

Unl # 2

Off

Off

Off

On*

On

Comp # 2

Unl # 1

Off

On

Off

Off

Comp # 2

Unl # 1

Off

On

Off

On

Off

Pumpdown

Pumpdown is accomplished by closing the liquid line solenoid valve on a circuit and operating a compressor on that circuit until the circuit low pressure switch opens. The compressor pumps most of the refrigerant into the condenser and then shuts off.

When pump down is required for a circuit, the liquid line solenoid valve for that circuit is closed (its output is off) and a compressor operates until the low pressure switch opens at which time the compressor is turned off. If the low pressure switch does not open in 180 seconds, pump down is terminated by turning off the compressor and its unloaders.

If a compressor in a circuit is operating, the circuit is pumped down when the last compressor is to shut off due to normal staging, or when the pump down switch for that circuit is placed in the Pumpdown (Open) position, or when the circuit or entire unit is shutdown due to any alarm other than the High Pressure Alarm. Of course, the conditions for completing pump down are met if the low pressure alarm shuts down the circuit so no pump down occurs as a result of this alarm.

Pumpdown is also initiated if no compressors are operating in a circuit, and the Pumpdown Switch is moved from the On

(Auto) position to the Off (Pumpdown) position twice in less than 20 seconds, and the low pressure switch is closed. In this case the first compressor on the circuit is used to pump down the circuit.

If two compressors on one circuit are operating when pump down is required for that circuit, the lag compressor in that circuit is turned off immediately and the circuit is pumped down using the lead compressor.

If any unloaders on a reciprocating compressor are deenergized when that compressor is required for pump down, they are energized and the circuit is pumped down using one completely unloaded compressor.

NOTE:

A reciprocating compressor is mechanically prevented from pumping down the circuit if the oil pressure switch is open .

Sump Pump Control

The Sump Pump Output is turned on whenever the unit is in the Cooling state and the Sump Water Level Input is present (On). The Sump Pump Output is turned on before any compressor or condenser fan is turned on. The Sump

Pump Output remains on for 10 minutes (adjustable) after unit leaves the Cooling operating state before turning off as long as the Sump Water Level Input is present (On).

A Sump Water Level problem alarm is generated if the unit has been in the Cooling operation state for 5 minutes and the

Sump Water Level Input is not present (Off). If this occurs, the Sump Pump output is turned off and mechanical cooling is disabled.

To prevent problems related to Sump Water Level Switch fluctuations, there is a 5 second “to off” time on the switch.

If Dolphin= Yes, the sump pump is run every day to reduce scaling. The Sump Pump Output is turned on for one hour if all of the following are true:

• Dolphin System= Yes

• Sump Pump Output has been off for more than 24 hours but less than 120 hours.

• The OAT is greater than 35°F.

• The Sump Drain Valve is closed.

OM 920-4 105

Operator’s Guide

Sump Drain Valve Control

When the sump temperature gets too cold, the sump needs to be emptied to prevent freezing. The Sump Drain Valve

Output is used to control a sump drain valve. This output is turned on if the sump temperature drops below the Sump

Dump Setpoint, default = 35°F for more than 30 seconds.

This output is turned back off if the sump temperature rises above this setpoint by more than the Sump Dump

Differential, 2°C (hardcoded), and the unit is in the Cooling state.

If Dolphin System= Yes and the pump does not run for five days, the sump needs to be emptied. This would occur when cooling is not required and the OAT remains below 35°F.

Sump heaters are used to keep the sump temperature above

35°F when the OAT drops below that value so an additional means of turning on the Sump Drain Valve is required. In addition to the requirement that the Sump Drain Valve Output be turned on to open the valve when the sump temperature drops below 35°F, the Sump Drain Valve Output is also turned on if both of the following are true:

• Dolphin System= Yes

• The Sump Pump Output has been off for 120 hours or more.

Once on the Sump Drain Valve is turned back off as described above.

Separator Flush Valve Control

On units equipped with a Dolphin System the system

Separator needs to be flushed of its collected solids every so often. An On/Off flush valve actuator is used to flush the separator. Every 8 hours the Purge Valve Binary Output is turned on for the Separator Flush Time (default 1 minute).

Sump Temperature Control

Two configurations of evaporative condensing units are provided. One will have two condenser fan outputs per circuit (Unit Size<110), and one will have three condenser fan outputs per circuit (Unit Size≥110). The two lead condenser fans are controlled through a single VFD.

Whenever any compressor is turned on, the lead condenser fan on both circuits is turned by the Microtech III controller sending a signal to the VFD via Modbus. The lead condenser fans on both circuits are turned off when all compressors are off or they are turned off as described in paragraphs that follow when the sump temperature gets low.

Whenever any condenser fan is on, a signal is sent to the VFD to control connected fans to a setpoint. The speed setpoint is calculated based on the sump temperature.

A single Condenser Fan Output A is controlled to turn on the second condenser fan on both circuits. A single Condenser

Fan Output B is controlled to turn on the second condenser fan on both circuits. The second and third fans on the circuits are mechanically prevented from operating when no compressor on that circuit is operating. When compressors are operating on both circuits, the number of fans operating on the two circuits is the same.

The number of fans operating per circuit will increase if the time since the last change in the number of operating fans exceeds the Evap Condensing Stage Time and the sump temperature exceeds the Max Sump Temperature setpoint.

This condenser fan stage increase may occur as soon as the temperature rises above the Maximum Sump Temperature.

The temperature does not have to remain above the Maximum

Sump Temperature for longer than the stage timer.

The number of fans operating per circuit will decrease if the time since the last change in the number of operating fans exceeds the Evap Condensing Stage Time, and the sump temperature drops below the Min Sump Temperature setting.

This condenser fan stage decrease may occur as soon as the temperature drops below the Minimum Sump Temperature setting. The temperature does not have to remain below the

Minimum Sump Temperature setting for longer than the stage timer.

After the two lead condenser fans are turned off via the VFD, they are turned back on as soon as the sump temperature rises above the Maximum Sump Temperature setting. This transition from stage zero to stage one is the only transition that does not require the Stage Timer to expire.

All of the condenser fans need to be run periodically when evaporative condensing is used to prevent damage to the motors due to their high humidity environment. As indicated above, the condensing fans controlled by the VFD always run when evaporative operation is in effect so no special control of these fans is required. The fan motors controlled directly through the Condenser Fan A and Condenser Fan B outputs are turned on and off based on time on and time off. When a condenser fan output must be turned on for normal operation, the output that has been off for the longest period of time is started. When a condenser fan must be turned off for normal operation, the output that has been on for the longest period of time is turned off.

106 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Heating Control

Entering Heating Operating State

The unit enters the Heating operating state from the Fan Only operating state when the control temperature falls below the

Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Set Point by more than half the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Dead Band. The unit transitions from the Heating to Fan Only operating state when the control temperature rises above the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Set Point by more than half the

Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Dead Band. The unit will also transition from the Heating to Fan Only operating state if heating operation is disabled due to OA ambient lockout.

Morning Warmup Control

The unit does not enter a specific morning warmup operating state to accomplish the morning warmup function. Instead the unit enters the Heating operation state when morning warmup operation is required. The dampers are held at zero percent open for Zero OA Timer after the SAF starts. The

Zero OA Timer should be set long enough to accomplish morning warmup with the dampers closed to minimize energy usage during the warmup period.

Zone Control Units

When a Zone Control Unit (Ctrl Typ=Zone) first starts in the morning it enters the Heating operating state if the Control

Temperature is below the Occupied Heating Setpoint by more that ½ the heating dead band. In this case The Occupied

Heating Setpoint is the “morning warmup setpoint”.

DAT Control Units

For Discharge Temperature Control units (Ctrl Type=DAC) there are two additional morning warmup related adjustable parameters; MWU Heating Setpoint and MWU Sensor.

When a Discharge Temperature Control unit first starts in the morning it enters the Heating operating state if the sensor selected by the MWU Sensor parameter (RAT or Space) is below the MWU Heating Setpoint by more that ½ the Heating dead band. The MWU Sensor can also be set to None. If the MWU Sensor is set to None the MWU Heating Setpoint has no effect and the unit only enters heating based on the

Occupied Setpoint in the normal manner.

Heating: Staged Zone Control

When the unit first enters the Heating operating state the unit goes directly to Stage # 1.

The number of heating stages increases when the time since the last stage change exceeds the stage time, the Projected

Control Temperature and the actual Control Temperature are less then the Occ Htg Spt (minus ½ the deadband), and the

DAT is less than the Max DAT Htg Spt.

The number of heating stages decreases when the time since the last stage change exceeds the stage time, and the Projected

Control Temperature and actual Contro Temperature are greater then the Occ Htg Spt (plus ½ the deadband).

The number of heating stages also decreases when the time since the last stage change exceeds the stage time, and the

DAT is greater than the MaxDATHtgSpt.

Heating DAT Staging or MinDAT Staging

When the unit enters the Heating or Minimum DAT states and all heating is off, the unit goes directly to Heating Stage #

1 so that the first stage of heat is turned on immediately.

The number of heating stages increases when the time since the last stage change exceeds the stage time, and DAT is less than the effective DAT setpoint (DAT staging) or the

Min DAT limit (MinDAT staging) by ½ the deadband. One exception to this is that if the current heating stage is zero, the heating stage can increase without regard to the stage timer.

The number of heating stages decreases when the time since the last stage change exceeds the stage time, and the DAT is greater than the effective DAT setpoint (DAT staging) or the

MIN DAT limit (MinDAT staging) by ½ the deadband.

The unit enters the Min DAT operating state during occupied operation when neither cooling nor heating is required based on the unit heat/cool changeover function but the discharge air temperature falls below a minimum discharge temperature limit by more than ½ the deadband. The Min DAT operating state prevents cold discharge air temperatures during what would normally be the Fan Only operating state.

OM 920-4 107

Operator’s Guide

Modulating

Entering Heating Operating State

The unit enters the Heating operating state from the Fan Only operating state when the Control Temperature falls below the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Set Point by more than half the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Dead Band. The unit transitions from heating to Fan only when the Control

Temperature rises above the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating

Set Point by more than half the Occupied or Unoccupied

Heating Dead Band. The unit will also transition from the

Heating to Fan Only operating state if heating operation is disabled due to OA ambient lockout. When the unit is in the Heating operating state, heating capacity is modulated to maintain the discharge air temperature at the Discharge

Heating Set Point.

There are several different modulating heating types available with this equipment. There are some differences in the control sequence depending on the heat type installed. The different types are described in the following sections.

Steam or Hot Water Heat: Face and Bypass Damper

Control

When a unit is equipped with steam or hot water with face and bypass damper heating there are two different methods used for controlling the heating arrangement. These are the

“Open Valve” and “Modulating Valve” methods and are described in the following sections.

Open Valve

When the unit enters the Heating operating state, the steam or hot water valve is driven fully open. The face and bypass dampers are then modulated to maintain the discharge air temperature at the discharge heating set point.

Modulating Valve

When the outdoor air temperature is below the F&BP changeover temperature, the Heating valve is driven to 100% open to protect the coil. The face and bypass dampers are then modulated to satisfy the heating load. When the outdoor air temperature rises above the F&B Changeover temperature by a fidderential of 2.0ºF, the face and bypass dampers are set at 100% open to the face of the coil and the Heating valve is modulated to satisfy the heating load. The default value for the changeover temperature is 37°F.

RTU Gas Heating

When a unit is equipped with modulating gas heating and is in the Heating operating state, the gas valve is modulated to maintain the discharge air temperature at the Discharge

Heating Set Point. Differences in the control of modulating gas heat are described in the following sections. On units equipped with modulating gas heat, the Discharge Heating

Set Point is limited according to a maximum heat exchanger temperature rise limit. This factory set limit varies depending on the unit burner model and can be found on the gas heat data plate attached to the unit. The controller does not allow the Discharge Heating Setpoint to be set above the current temperature entering the discharge fan (EFT) by more than this maximum heat exchanger temperature rise limit.

Min DAT

If heating is enabled and there is no heating load (normally

Fan Only operating state), the controller activates the units heating equipment as required to prevent the discharge air temperature from becoming too cool if the Min DAT Control

Flag (DAT units only) is set to yes via the Heating menu.

The unit enters the Min DAT operating state during occupied operation when neither cooling nor heating is required based on the heat/cool changeover function but the discharge temperature falls below a minimum discharge temperature limit. If the discharge air temperature falls below the this minimum discharge temperature limit by more than half the discharge heating deadband, the unit operating state changes from Fan Only to Min DAT. Note: On VAV or CAV discharge control units, the DAT cooling setpoint parameter in the Cooling menu acts as the minimum discharge temperature limit. On CAV zone control units the Min DAT

Limit parameter in the Heating menu acts as the minimum discharge temperature limit.

Typical Sequence of Operation (20-1 gas burner)

When 120V power is furnished through the system on/ off switch (S1), through the burner on/off switch (S3), and through the high limit control (FLC), terminal #6 on the flame safeguard (FSG) is powered on a call for heat.

Whenever power is restored to the flame safeguard, the flame safeguard will go through a 10 second initiation period before the prepurge period will begin. The burner air control valve will be at minimum position during off cycles. Upon a call for heat or any other time that a prepurge cycle occurs, the air control valve will be repositioned to the maximum position for prepurge and then returned to the minimum position for low fire start.

108 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Upon a call for heat, the controller will close digital output

(EXPB-DO1) and energize the R20A relay. Once the normally open contacts of the R20A relay close 120V power is supplied to terminal # 6 on the FSG. The FSG then energizes its terminal #4, which powers the burner combustion air blower motor (BM) and starts the 90 second prepurge cycle. The controller will reposition the burner air valve to its maximum open position via analog output EXPBAO_X7 for prepurge.

When the burner air valve reaches the full open position switch (LS2) will ‘make’ and provide a digital input to the controller (EXPB-DI_X3). This digital input will initiate a

20 second timing period in the controller. At the completion of the timing period, the controller will begin to drive the burner air valve to its minimum (low fire) position. When the valve reaches the minimum position switch LS1 will ‘make’ and provide a digital input to the controller (EXPB-DI_X2) indicating the controller’s prepurge sequence is complete.

As soon as the FSG prepurge time expires FSG terminal #8 will energize relay R22 which will turn on a digital input to the controller (EXPB-DI-X1). As soon as this digital input is

‘made’ the controller will close digital output (EXPB-DO2) allowing the combination gas valve(s) (GV1) to be energized.

After completion of the FSG prepurge period there will be a 10 second trial for ignition during which terminal #8

(combination gas valve - GV1) and terminal #10 (ignition transformer - IT) will be energized. If flame is being detected through the flame rod (FD) at the completion of the

10 second trial for ignition period, terminal #10 (ignition transformer - IT) will be deenergized and terminal #9 (main gas valves - GV4 and GV5 depending on burner size) will be energized and the control system will be allowed to control the firing rate once the heating stage timer (default 5 minutes) has passed. After the flame has lit and been proven and the heating stage time has passed, the controller will modulate (VM1) to the required firing rate via analog output

EXPB-AO_X7. In the event the flame fails to ignite or the flame safeguard fails to detect its flame within 10 seconds, terminals #4, 8, 9, and 10 will be de-energized, thus deenergizing the burner. The FSG will then lockout and would require manual resetting. If the FSG lockout occurs, FSG terminal #3 will energize the R24 alarm input status relay which will ‘make’ a digital input to the controller (EXPB-DI_

X4). When this digital input is ‘made’ the controller will drive

VM1 to the closed position, de-energize digital output EXPB-

DO2 and the prepurge sequence will be disabled and reset. If the FSG terminal # 8 de-energizes R22 (EXPB-DI_X1) after having it turned on and the FSG is not off on safety lockout, the prepurge sequence will start over. If an attempt is made to restart the burner by resetting the FSG or if an automatic restart is initiated after flame failure the earlier described prepurge cycle with the wide open air valve will be repeated.

If the unit overheats, the high limit control (FLC) will cycle the burner, limiting furnace temperature to the limit control set point. The flame safeguard contains ‘LEDS’ (lower left corner) that will glow to indicate operation.

Typical Sequence of Operation (3-1 Gas)

When 120V power is furnished through the system on/ off switch (S1), through the burner on/off switch (S3), and through the high limit control (FLC), terminal #6 on the flame safeguard (FSG) is powered on a call for heat.

Whenever power is restored to the flame safeguard, the flame safeguard will go through a 10 second initiation period before the prepurge period will begin. The burner air control valve will be at minimum position during off cycles.

Upon a call for heat, the controller will close digital output

(EXPB-DO1) and energize the R20A relay. Once the normally open contacts of the R20A relay close, 120V power is supplied to terminal # 6 on the FSG. The FSG then energizes its terminal #4, which powers the burner combustion air blower motor (BM) and starts the FSG prepurge cycle.

After completion of the FSG prepurge period there will be a 10 second trial for ignition during which terminal #8

(combination gas valve - GV1) and terminal #10 (ignition transformer - IT) will be energized. If flame is being detected through the flame rod (FD) at the completion of the 10 second trial for ignition period, terminal #10 (ignition transformer

- IT) will be deenergized and terminal #9 (main gas valves -

GV4 and GV5) will be energized and the control system will be allowed to control the firing rate once the heating stage timer (default 5 minutes) has passed. After the flame has lit and been proven and the heating stage time has passed, the controller will modulate (VM1) to the required firing rate via analog output EXPBAO_X7. In the event the flame fails to ignite or the flame safeguard fails to detect its flame within

10 seconds, terminals #4, 8, 9, and 10 will be de-energized, thus de-energizing the burner. The FSG will then lockout and require manual resetting. If the FSG lockout occurs, FSG terminal #3 will energize the R24 alarm input status relay which will ‘make’ a digital input to the controller (EXPB-

DI_X4). When this digital input is ‘made’ the controller will drive VM1 to the closed position. If the FSG terminal 8 de-energizes relay R22 (EXPBDI_X1) after having it turned on and the FSG is not off on safety lockout the controller will drive VM1 to the closed position. If an attempt is made to reset the FSG or if an automatic restart is initiated after flame failure, the FSG prepurge cycle will be repeated. If the unit overheats, the high limit control (FLC) will cycle the burner, limiting furnace temperature to the limit control set point.

The flame safeguard contains ‘LEDS’ (lower left corner) that will glow to indicate operation.

OM 920-4 109

Operator’s Guide

Special Start Sequence for 100% Outdoor Air Units with Gas Heat

A special start sequence is used for units 100% outdoor air units with gas heat. The special start sequence applies to both Zone Control and DAT Control units. If heat is required at unit startup, the furnace enters a special burner startup sequence as the unit enters its Startup operating state. Prefiring the burner allows the gas heat pre-purge sequence to occur and the burner to fire and warm up so that tempered air is available immediately when the fans start.

Once a 100% Outdoor Air unit equipped with gas heat completes one of the start up sequences described below the gas heat operates the same for both return air units and 100% outdoor air units.

The sequence described in the following paragraphs is initiated for a 100% OA Zone Control unit any time during the Startup operating state when the Control Temperature is less than the Effective Occupied or Unoccupied Heating

Setpoint† by ½ the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating

Deadband or the OAT is less than the Min DAT Limit by the amount of the DAT Htg Deadband. The sequence described in the following paragraphs is initiated for 100% OA DAT

Control units during the startup operating state when the

Min DAT Ctrl parameter is set via the keypad and the OAT is less than the DATClgSpt by the amount of the DAT Htg

Deadband.

† The Effective Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint equals the Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint for

Zone Control units. Otherwise it equals the Morning Warmup

Heating Setpoint (DAT Control units). The special start up sequence is initiated during the Startup operating state. The fans will remain off. The main gas valve is energized so the burner starts during the Warmup Time (default = 240 seconds) and operates at low fire.

At the end of the Warmup Time, the modulating gas heating valve is set to a calculated position. This calculated position is based on the “Application Discharge Air Temperature

Setpoint”, the outdoor air temperature, and the Maximum

Temperature Rise of the gas heat exchanger using the following formula:

Gas Heat Actuator Position = 100% x (Setpoint - Outdoor Air

Temp) / Temp Rise

The Application Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint is the

Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint if the control temperature initiated the special start sequence. If the OAT initiated the special start sequence, the setpoint is the Min

DAT Limit for Zone Control units and the Eff DAT Clg Spt for DAT Control units. The Temp Rise is the Maximum

Temperature Rise of the gas heat exchanger that is entered at the factory for the specific unit. After the modulating gas heating valve is set to the calculated position, there is a HeatUpDelay (default = 60 second) to allow the heat exchanger to heat up. After this delay, since the unit is 100%

Outside Air, the unit immediately transitions from Startup

110 to the Fan Only state. As soon as the unit enters the Fan

Only state, the unit will immediately transition to either the

Heating state or the MinDAT state.

The unit remains in either the Heating or Minimum DAT operating state for the duration of the Hold Period (Default =

240 seconds). The gas heating valve does not modulate from its calculated value to allow the temperature to approach equilibrium with modulating gas heating valve at a fixed position.

The unit reverts to normal modulation of the gas heating valve when the Hold Period has elapsed since the unit entered

Heating or MinDAT.

Return Air Units

When the unit enters the Heating operating state, the controller first holds the gas valve at the minimum fire position (5% or 33% depending on the burner model) until the Heating Interstage Timer expires. Then, the controller modulates the gas valve to maintain the discharge air temperature at the Discharge Heating Set Point.

MPS Gas Heating

Sequence of Operation (Staged Control)

Low Heat Option (2 Stage Control)

The following details the sequence of operation for the low heat option.

• Unit controller calls for heat.

• Furnace DDC control module receives a call for heat.

• High limit switch is checked for safe condition.

• Proof of airflow switch is checked for combustion airflow.

• 60 second prepurge cycle starts.

• Spark ignitor is activated for 3 seconds.

• Gas valve receives a command for stage 1 of heat.

• Burner is ignited.

• Unit controller calls for stage 2 of heat.

• Furnace DDC controller receives a stage 2 heat command.

• Gas valve receives a command for stage 2 of heat.

High Heat Option (4 Stage Control)

For a unit with the optional high heat the above sequence is followed for the first two stages. For the remaining 2 stages the above procedure is repeated on the second furnace module.

OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Sequence of Operation (Modulating Burner)

Low Heat Option with Modulation

The following details the sequence of operation for the low heat option.

• Unit DDC controller calls for heat.

• Furnace DDC control module receives a call for heat.

• Furnace safety switches and DDC control are checked for safe conditions.

• 45 second prepurge cycle starts. Proof of airflow switch is checked for combustion airflow.

• Spark ignitor is activated.

• Gas valve receives a signal to open fully.

• Burner is ignited and runs for 20 seconds in high fire.

NOTE:

If call for heat is interrupted during this timing, the furnace will be locked in for the 20 seconds cycle .

• Gas valve and induction blower motor receives a signal to modulate burner output to match the unit discharge air temperature setting.

Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint Reset - Heating

The Heating DAT Setpoint may be reset for units with DAT

Heating Control. The Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint will never be set below the Minimum DAT Heating Setpoint or above the Maximum DAT heating Setpoint on the Heating

Reset menu. The reset type may be set to one of the following:

• None: Discharge Heating Spt is user adjustable

• Network: Discharge Heating Spt is equal to the Network

DAT Htg Setpoint when it is valid

• Space: Discharge Heating Spt is based on the Space

Sensor

• Return: Discharge Heating Spt is based on the Return

Air Sensor

• OAT: Discharge Heating Spt is based on the Outdoor Air

Temperature

• Ext mA: Discharge Heating Spt is determined by a 0-20 or 4-20 mA signal

• Ext V: Discharge Heating Spt is determined by a 0-10 or

2 - 10 VDC signal

Reset reverts from Return to None when the return air sensor opens or shorts. Reset reverts from Space to None when the space sensor opens or shorts. Reset reverts from OAT to None when the outdoor air sensor opens or shorts.

When Space, Return, OAT, Ext mA, or Ext V is selected, the Discharge Heating Spt equals the Max Htg Spt when the selected value equals the Max Htg Spt @ value. Similarly, the Discharge Heating Spt equals the Min Htg Spt when the selected value equals the Min Htg Spt @ value.

When Space, Return, or OAT is selected, the reset schedule should be set so that the DAT Heating setpoint decreases as the selected temperature increases as shown in the graph.

When Ext mA is selected, the values “Min Htg Spt @” and

“Max Htg Spt @” are entered as mA values. When Ext VDC is selected, the values “Min Htg Spt @” and “Max Htg Spt

@” are entered as VDC values.

If Ext mA or Ext V is selected as the type of reset, the Min

Htg Spt @ value may be set above the Max Htg Spt @ value to cause a decrease in the DAT setpoint as the external signal or the Min Htg Spt @ value may be set below the Max Htg

Spt @ value to cause an increase in the DAT setpoint as the external signal increase.

When ever the Clg Reset Type or Engineering Units is changed, the Min Clg Spt @ and Max Clg Spt @ values revert to default values as follows:

• None: Min Clg Spt @=0NA, Max Clg Spt @=100NA

• Network: Min Clg Spt @=0NA, Max Clg Spt @=100NA

• Space, Return: Min Clg Spt @=73.0F, Max Clg Spt

@=71.0F

• OAT: Min Clg Spt @=90.0F, Max Clg Spt @=70.0F

• ExtmA: Min Clg Spt @=4.0mA, Max Clg Spt @=20.0mA

• ExtVDC: Min Clg Spt @=0.0V, Max Clg Spt @=10.0V

An example of discharge temperature reset based on outdoor air temperature is illustrated in

Figure 19

(Cooling Reset

Type Flag is set to “OAT” in this example). When the current outdoor air temperature is greater than or equal to the Minimum Cooling Set Point Reset Value (90°F in this example), the Discharge Cooling Set Point is set equal to the

Minimum Discharge Cooling Set Point (55°F in this example).

This is shown as Point C in

Figure 19 . When the current

outdoor air temperature is less than or equal to the Maximum

Cooling Set Point Reset Value (70°F in this example), the

Discharge Cooling Set Point is set equal to the Maximum

Discharge Cooling Set Point (65°F in this example). This is shown as Point A in

Figure 19

. When the current outdoor air temperature is between the Minimum Cooling Set Point

Reset Value and the Maximum Cooling Set Point Reset Value, the Discharge Cooling Set Point varies linearly between the Minimum Discharge Cooling Set Point and Maximum

Discharge Cooling Set Point. This is shown as Point B in

Figure 19

.

OM 920-4 111

Operator’s Guide

Figure 19: Discharge Temperature Reset Based on

Temperature

Indoor Air Fan - On/Off Control

A supply fan is provided on every unit. That may be the only fan, but either a return fan or an exhaust fan, or fans, can be provided also. The start/stop signal and the speed signal for fans that are controlled by variable frequency drives are provided via an internal ModBus network. Constant volume supply and return fans are started and stopped through digital outputs.

Supply Fan

The supply fan is turned on when the unit enters the

Recirculation state. The supply fan is turned off when the unit transitions to the Off state, but it stays on for a

OffHtClDelayTime (Default- 120 seconds) if the unit is turned off while DX cooling or staged heating is active.

The OffHtClDelayTime function is overridden when and

Emergency Off or Duct High Limit fault is active.

Return Fan

A return fan driven by a variable frequency drive is started four seconds after the supply fan is started to reduce the amp draw peak on startup. A constant volume return fan is turned on through the same output as the supply fan. An external

Fan Delay Relay is used to provide a delay between startups if required.

Supply Fan Capacity Control (VAV)

The speed of a modulating supply fan is controlled by a

0-100% signal provided to the VFD via an internal Modbus network. Supply Fan Capacity Control for a modulating fan is controlled to either maintain the duct static pressure at a desired value or maintain a fixed speed based on a signal provided via a network.

The choice of control method, SF Cap Ctrl, may be set to

Duct Pressure or Speed via the keypad. After the supply fan is started, a speed signal of 33% is sent to the variable frequency drive for the DSPCtrlDelay (Default=30 seconds).

Control reverts to either duct pressure or speed after the fan has been on for the duration of the DSPCtrlDelay time. The

VFD speed is not controlled below the minimum SAF speed setting (default 33%) while the fan is operating.

NOTE:

Units supplied with Daikin MD2, MD3, and MD6 drives will have a user editable maximum supply fan hertz setpoint (default 60 Hz) located in the SAF Set

Up menu . This parameter can be changed when job site conditions require the speed of the drive to be above 60 Hz .

Duct Static Pressure Control

The supply air fan speed is controlled by a VFD. The control parameter for the fan speed is the duct static pressure setpoint. If the duct static pressure is below the duct static pressure setpoint by more than ½ the deadband, the fan speed will increase. Likewise if the duct static pressure is above the duct static pressure setpoint by more than ½ the deadband the fan speed will decrease. Example - if the duct static pressure setpoint is 1.2" and the deadband is 0.1",the duct static pressure must reach 1.14 before the fan will increase in speed. The Duct Static Pressure setpoint may be set through the keypad or via a network signal. The active setpoint is changed whenever either of these values changes so it equals whichever value was changed most recently.

Speed/Network

When speed control is selected, the fan operates at the larger of its minimum speed or a value provided via a connected network or the keypad/display.

Single Zone VAV Control (1ZnVAV)

When space temperature control is selected, the supply fan

VFD is controlled with a PI_Loop to maintain the Control

Temperature input at the Occupied or Unoccupied Cooling

Setpoint or Occupied or Unoccupied Heating Setpoint. This control choice is designed for DAC control type and will be used in applications where the unit will act as a single

VAV box to control space temperature. Cooling and heating discharge air temperature control and outside air damper control will function in the normal manner as with VAV units.

112 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Cooling/Economizer

When the Unit State is Cooling or Econo the Single Zone

VAV Control PI_Loop will be set for direct acting control to modulate the supply fan VFD to maintain the Control

Temperature at the Occupied Cooling Setpoint. As the

Control Temperature rises, the VFD speed will be increased and as the Control Temperature falls, the VFD speed will be decreased. An adjustable Minimum Cooling Speed and Maximum Cooling Speed value limits the range of modulation of the VFD.

Heating

When the Unit State is Heating the Single Zone VAV Control

PI_Loop will be set to reverse acting control to modulate the supply fan VFD to maintain the Control Temperature at the Occupied Heating Setpoint. As the Control Temperature falls, the VFD speed will be increased and as the Control

Temperature rises, the VFD speed will be decreased. An adjustable Minimum Heating Speed and Maximum Heating

Speed value limits the range of modulation of the VFD

Fan Only/MinDat

When the Unit State is FanOnly or MinDat, the supply fan speed will be held fixed at the speed the VFD was operating upon entering the FanOnly or MinDat state. This will be either the Minimum Cooling Speed or the Minimum Heating

Speed depending on the state the unit enters FanOnly/MinDat from

Building Static Pressure Control (BSP)

Building static pressure supply fan control is available on

100% OA units that have the Control Type set to Zone or

DAC. Building static pressure supply fan control is not available if the Control Type set to 1ZnVAV (2). When BSP is selected as the SAF capacity control method, the supply fan

VFD is controlled to maintain a building static pressure input at a building static pressure setpoint using a PI Loop.

A BSP Input parameter allows for selecting No or Yes for supply fan building static pressure control. If BSP Input is set to No then no monitoring or control based on BSP is possible.

All menu items related to BSP control are removed from the

HMI in this case. If BSP Input is set to Yes then the building static pressure input is available for control and monitoring purposes.

Carbon Dioxide Control (CO

2

)

CO

2

supply fan control is available on 100% OA units that have the Control Type set to Zone or DAC.

CO

2

supply fan control is not available if the Control Type set to 1ZnVAV. When CO

2

is selected as the SAF capacity control method, the supply fan VFD is controlled based on a

CO

2

input. The supply fan speed varies linearly between the

Minimum PPM Speed and the Maximum PPM Speed value as the PPM input varies from the Minimum SAF PPM and the

Maximum SAF PPM value. A CO

2

Input parameter allows for selecting None, VDC or mA as the type of input for the CO

2 sensor in this case.

If CO

2

Input is set to None then no monitoring or control based on CO

2

is possible. All menu items related to CO

2 control and scaling are removed from the HMI in this case.

If CO

2

Input is set to VDC then the CO

2

input is available for control and/or monitoring purposes and the sensor scaling parameters are in terms of volts DC. If CO

2

Input is set to mA then the CO

2

input is available for control and/or monitoring purposes and the sensor scaling parameters are in terms of milliamps.

Airflow Control (CFM)

Airflow supply fan control is available on 100% OA units that have the Control Type set to Zone or DAC. Airflow supply fan control is not available if the Control Type set to 1ZnVAV.

When CFM is selected as the SAF capacity control method, the supply fan VFD is controlled to maintain a CFM input at a

Minimum Outside Air CFM Setpoint using a PI Loop.

A CFM Input parameter allows for selecting None, VDC or mA as the type of input for the CFM sensor in this case.

If CFM Input= is set to None then no monitoring or control based on CFM is possible. All menu items related to CFM control and scaling are removed from the HMI in this case.

If CFM Input is set to VDC then the CFM input is available for control and/or monitoring purposes and the sensor scaling parameters are in terms of volts DC. If CFM Input is set to mA then the CFM input is available for control and/or monitoring purposes and the sensor scaling parameters are in terms of milliamps.

OM 920-4 113

Operator’s Guide

Modulating Return and Exhaust Fan Control (RTU,

MPS)

Four different approaches may be used to maintain the building static pressure at acceptable levels. An analog signal is provided to the VFD to control return or exhaust fan to:

• Maintain the speed of a return fan based on supply fan speed (Fan Tracking)

• Maintain the building static pressure at a desired value

• Maintain a fixed speed based on a signal provided by a

Building Automation System via a network.

• Vary the speed of an exhaust fan based on OA Damper position.

Any of the first three methods may be selected for a return fan. Building Static Pressure, Speed, or OA Damper may be selected for an exhaust fan.

When the unit is in the Off or Startup state, the variable frequency drive for the return or exhaust is driven to 0%.

After the return or exhaust fan is started, a speed signal of 5% for exhaust fan or 33% for return fan is sent to the variable frequency drive for the BSPCtrlDelay (Default=30 seconds) and the VFD will increase its speed to 5% (or 33%). Control reverts to one of the methods below after the fan has been on for the BSPCtrlDelay. The VFD speed is not controlled below

5% (or 33%) while the fan is operating.

During non-Off states when the outdoor air damper is closed, the speed of the return fan is set equal to the supply fan speed.

Under these conditions, the return fan is set to 100% if the supply fan is a constant volume fan. To provide a “bumpless transfer” when the outdoor air damper opens the return fan will start to control building static pressure from its speed when the damper was closed. Exhaust fans do not use this feature.

NOTE:

Units supplied with Daikin MD2, MD3, and MD6 drives will have a user editable maximum return fan/ exhaust fan hertz setpoint (default 60 Hz) located in the RF/EF Set Up menu . This parameter can be changed when job site conditions require the speed of the drive to be above 60 Hz .

Fan Tracking Control

For units with variable frequency drives, the return fan may be controlled such that the return fan speed tracks up and down with the supply fan speed. The user defines the position of the return fan with respect to the supply fan for minimum and maximum positions. When the supply fan is between the minimum and maximum positions, the fan varies proportionally between its minimum and maximum values. There are four adjustable parameters to define this relationship. They are:

Supply Fan (DF) Value Return Fan (RF) Value

Supply Fan Max Return Fan @ Supply Fan Max

Supply Fan Min Return Fan @ Supply Fan Min

To set the four parameters described above, the airflow and return vane positions are adjusted until maximum airflow and proper indoor conditions are met. The supply fan is controlled normally as the VAV boxes are adjusted to obtain maximum airflow. The return fan is adjusted using the Remote RF/EF setting on the keypad. The user then uses the key to set the

Supply Fan Max values and Return Fan @ Supply Fan Max to the observed values. The process is repeated at minimum airflow to set Supply Fan Min and Return Fan @ Supply Fan

Min values.

Building Static Pressure Control

A PI control loop is used to modulate the variable frequency drive of the exhaust fans to maintain a measured building static pressure at a setpoint. The BSP Gain, Project Ahead

Time, and Sample Time are editable via the keypad

The Building Static Pressure setpoint may be set through the keypad or via a network signal. The active setpoint is changed whenever either of these values changes so it equals whichever value was changed most recently.

Speed/Network Control

Single zone VAV control is available when the unit Control

Type is Single Zone VAV (1ZnVAV). When single zone VAV control is selected as the SAF capacity control method, the supply fan VFD or ECM motor is controlled with a PI_Loop to maintain the Control Temperature input at the Occupied

Cooling Setpoint or Occupied Heating Setpoint. This option is designed for discharge control applications where the unit will act as a single VAV box to control space temperature.

OAT is not allowed as the Control Temperature when SAF capacity control method is set to 1ZnVAV. Cooling and heating discharge air temperature control and outside air damper control will function in the normal manner as with

VAV units.

NOTE:

Single zone VAV control of SAF is not available when the Control Temperature Source is set to None .

114 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

Exhaust Fan - Speed Control

The exhaust fan is turned on when the OA Dampers are at least open to the Minimum Exhaust OA Position (default

5%), the SAF capacity is above the Minimum Exhaust SAF capacity (default 10%), and the Remote Exhaust Fan capacity is commanded to a value above the minimum value (Default

= 5%) by a BAS for longer than the Minimum Exhaust Fan

On Time (Default = 120 seconds).

The exhaust fan is turned off when the Supply Fan is turned off when the Remote Exhaust Fan capacity is commanded to less than or equal to its minimum value (Default = 5%) for longer than the MinExhStopTime (Default = 120 seconds).

Modulating Propeller Exhaust- OA Damper Control

When the unit is equipped with a modulating propeller exhaust fan arrangement and the Return/Exhaust Fan

Capacity Control Method is set to OA Damper, the exhaust fan is turned on at an adjustable outdoor air damper position

(default 40%), and is turned back off when the dampers are below this setting for more that the minimum exhaust stop time (Default = 120 seconds). When on the fan is modulated linearly between the minimum exhaust fan speed and 100% as the dampers vary between the Exhaust On OA Position and the Exhaust Maximum OA Position.

Exhaust Fan - Building Static Pressure Control

An exhaust fan, or fans, driven by a variable frequency drive is started based on building static pressure. A constant volume exhaust fan is turned on through the same output as the supply fan. An external Fan Delay Relay is used to provide a delay between startups if required.

A VAV exhaust fan is turned on when the OA Dampers are at least open to the Minimum Exhaust OA Position (default

5%), the SAF capacity is above the Minimum Exhaust SAF capacity (default 10%), and the building static pressure is above the building static pressure setpoint by more than the deadband for longer than the Minimum Exhaust Fan Start

Time (Default = 120 seconds).

A VAV exhaust fan is turned off when the supply fan is turned off or when the building static pressure is below the building static pressure setpoint by more than the deadband, or the OA Dampers are open less than the Minimum Exhaust

OA Position (default 5%), or the SAF capacity is below the Minimum Exhaust SAF capacity (default 10%), and the Exhaust Fan capacity is at or below its minimum value

(Default = 5%) for longer than the Min Exhaust Fan Stop

Time (Default = 120 seconds).

Exhaust Fan - Speed Control

When speed control is selected, the fan operates at the larger of its minimum speed or a value provided via a connected network or the keypad/display.

The exhaust fan is turned on when the OA Dampers are at least open to the Minimum Exhaust OA Position (default

5%), the SAF capacity is above the Minimum Exhaust SAF capacity (default 10%), and the Remote Exhaust Fan capacity is commanded to a value above the minimum value (Default

= 5%) by a BAS for longer than the Minimum Exhaust Start

Time (Default = 120 seconds)

The exhaust fan is turned off when the supply fan is turned off when the Remote Exhaust Fan capacity is commanded to less than or equal to its minimum value (Default = 5%) for longer than the Minimum Exhaust Stop Time (Default = 120 seconds).

Staged Exhaust (MPS Units) Exhaust Fan - OA

Damper Control

When the Return Fan Type is set to 1StgExh, 2StgExh or

3StgExh and the Return/Exhaust Fan Capacity Control

Method is set to OA Damper, one, two or three exhaust fans are turned on and off based on the outdoor air damper position. Refer to the following table for the number of fans versus unit size.

Table 56:

Fan Configuration

MPS Unit Size

15

18

20

25

30

35

40

50

Number of Fans

1

1

2

2

2

2

3

3

The default exhaust fan On and Off values are as follows:

Table 57: Fan Settings

Action

Exh Fan Stg 1 On

Exh Fan Stg 1 Off

Exh Fan Stg 2 On

Exh Fan Stg 2 Off

Exh Fan Stg 3 On

Exh Fan Stg 3 Off

Default OA Setting

40%

30%

55%

40%

70%

50%

Adjustable Range

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

0–100%

OM 920-4 115

Operator’s Guide

Troubleshooting

Fan Failure Codes

HLL = Hall Sensor Error

First occurrence:

Power fluctuations may be responsible.

Corrective:

Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it. If applicable, filter out the source of the disturbing voltage .

Repeated occurrence:

Question:

Do other fans show the same failure?

Yes:

Systematically search for voltage peaks .

No:

It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan . Fan need to be replaced .

TFEI = Electronics Interior Overheated

First occurrence:

Too high ambient temperature may be responsible .

Question:

• Could ambient temperature have been too high?

• Is it possible to connect the fan to EC Control in order to display the temperature? If so, is the

displayed temperature within the expected temperature range?

Corrective:

If the displayed temperature is above 95°C (the electronics switches off at 105°C,) double-check the ambient temperature in each operating mode .

Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it .

Repeated occurrence:

Question:

Do other fans show the same failure?

Yes:

Systematically search for the cause of excessive ambient temperature . Perhaps use a data logger or read out the electronics temperature via EC Control .

No:

It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan . Fan need to be replaced .

TFM = Motor Overheated

First occurrence:

Excessive ambient temperature may be responsible .

Question:

• Could ambient temperature have been too high? Or is the motor overloaded?

• Is it possible to connect the fan to EC Control in order to display the motor temperature?

• Is the displayed temperature within the expected temperature range?

Corrective:

If the displayed temperature is too high:

• Double-check the motor temperature in each operating mode.

• Check of the fan load: Measure the input power at max. load/ operating point and compare the

measured value with nominal data on the label . Is there any discrepancy?

• Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it.

Repeated occurrence:

Question:

Do other fans show the same failure?

Yes:

systematically search for the cause of excessive ambient temperature . Perhaps use a data logger or read out the electronics temperature via EC Control .

No:

It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan . Fan need to be replaced .

116 OM 920-4

Operator’s Guide

TFE = Power Mod Overheated

First occurrence:

Excessive ambient temperature may be responsible .

Question:

• Do other fans (temporarily) show the same failure within the arrangement? Could ambient temperature

have been too high? Or is the motor overloaded?

• Is it possible to connect the fan to EC Control in order to display the temperature?

• Is the displayed temperature within the expected temperature range?

Corrective:

If the displayed temperature is too high:

• Check the module temperature during operation in each operating mode (Tmodule <110°C;

switching-off temperature 115°C)

• Check the fan load and supply voltage: Measure the input power at max. load/ operating point and

compare the measured value with nominal data on the label . Is there any discrepancy?

• Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it.

Repeated occurrence:

Question:

Do other fans show the same failure?

Yes:

No:

Systematic search for the reason of too high ambient temperature, overload, overvoltage or low voltage . Perhaps use a data logger .

It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan . Fan need to be replaced .

BLK = Locked Motor

First occurrence:

Question:

• Is it possible that the motor was locked by an obstruction or ice?

• Do other fans show the same behaviour?

Corrective:

Remove the reason for blocking . Caused by ice: activate the shake-loose functionality (starting with

ModBus 5) or increase the starting phase control factor .

Repeated occurrence:

Question:

Does increasing the starting phase control factor improve the situation?

No:

It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan . Fan need to be replaced .

SKF = Communication Error

First occurrence:

Power fluctuations may be responsible.

Corrective:

Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it. If applicable, filter out the source of the disturbing signal .

Repeated occurrence:

Question:

Do other fans show the same failure?

Yes: systematic search for peaks of disturbance voltage

No:

It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan . Fan need to be replaced .

OM 920-4 117

Operator’s Guide

PHA = Phase failure

UzLow = DC-Link Undervoltage

UzHigh = DC-Link Overvoltage

UeHigh = Mains Overvoltage

UeLow = Mains Undervoltage

Question:

Can the main voltage be measured at any spot; a data logger may be helpful .

No:

Measure the voltage at the power supply input of the concerned fan .

Corrective:

• Reset the failure; re-start the motor and observe it.

• If applicable, filter out the source of disturbing signal.

Repeated occurrence:

Question:

• Do other fans show the same failure?

• How often does the failure occur?

• Get big electrical consumer loads switched at the same time when the failure occurs in the

surrounding area?

• Are compressors or large asynchronous motors applied within the arrangement?

Yes:

Systematic search for external disturbance voltage peaks; If applicable, usage of data logger for a longer period and analysis of the measured values .

• Are the voltage values within the specified range?

No:

It seems to be a hardware problem of the fan . Fan need to be replaced .

118 OM 920-4

Daikin Training and Development

Now that you have made an investment in modern, efficient Daikin equipment, its care should be a high priority. For training information on all Daikin HVAC products, please visit us at www.DaikinAppliedcom and click on training, or call 540-248-9646 and ask for the Training Department.

Warranty

All Daikin equipment is sold pursuant to its standard terms and conditions of sale, including Limited

Product Warranty. Consult your local Daikin Representative for warranty details. Refer to Form

933-430285Y. To find your local Daikin Representative, go to www.DaikinApplied.com.

Aftermarket Services

To find your local parts office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-37PARTS (800-377-2787).

To find your local service office, visit www.DaikinApplied.com or call 800-432-1342.

This document contains the most current product information as of this printing. For the most up-to-date product information, please go to www.DaikinApplied.com.

Products manufactured in an ISO Certified Facility.

Daikin Applied

800.432.1342

www.DaikinApplied.com

© 2013 Daikin Applied

04/13

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents